YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2004 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WC85520
RX-V750 AV Receiver
DSP-AX750SE AV Amplifier
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
GB
RX-V750/DSP-AX750SE
RXV750_RDS_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 21, 2004 11:44 AM
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,
dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,
20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of
this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit
in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with
a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this
unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may
fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to
liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,
do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall
and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user
and/or damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified
is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be
held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical
storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods
of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models
only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE
plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
Asia model ...................... 220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model .. 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the
standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
Note
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page i Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
1
English
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Using the remote control ........................................... 8
Front panel display .................................................... 9
Rear panel ................................................................ 11
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12
Speaker placement ................................................... 12
Speaker connections ................................................ 13
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 16
Before connecting components................................ 16
Connecting video components................................. 17
Connecting audio components................................. 20
Connecting the antennas (RX-V750)....................... 22
Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 23
Turning on the power............................................... 25
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26
Introduction.............................................................. 26
Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26
Starting the setup ..................................................... 27
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 31
Basic operations....................................................... 31
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 33
Selecting input modes.............................................. 37
TUNING (RX-V750) ............................................ 39
Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 39
Presetting stations .................................................... 40
Selecting preset stations........................................... 42
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43
Receiving RDS stations ........................................... 44
Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 44
PTY SEEK function ................................................ 45
EON function........................................................... 46
RECORDING ....................................................... 47
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................48
For movie/video sources.......................................... 48
For music sources .................................................... 51
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................52
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 52
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 52
Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 53
Using the test tone ................................................... 54
SET MENU ............................................................55
Using SET MENU................................................... 56
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 57
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 61
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 63
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................65
Control area ............................................................. 65
Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 66
Controlling other components ................................. 68
Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 69
Changing source names in the display window....... 70
Clearing function sets .............................................. 71
Clearing individual functions .................................. 72
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......73
What is a sound field ............................................... 73
Changing parameter settings ................................... 73
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................75
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................79
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........84
GLOSSARY...........................................................85
Audio formats .......................................................... 85
Sound field programs............................................... 86
Audio information ................................................... 86
Video signal information ......................................... 87
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................88
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 1 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
FEATURES
2
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)
Front: 100 W + 100 W
Center: 100 W
Surround: 100 W + 100 W
Surround back: 100 W + 100 W
Sound field features
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic
IIx decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner (RX-V750)
◆ 40-station random access preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
Other features
◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer for automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ A SET MENU which provides you with items for
optimizing this unit for your audio/video system
◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and
PCM sources
◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this
unit
◆ S-Video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-Video
→ Component video) capability for monitor out
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes and
“learning” capability
• This document is the owner’s manual for both RX-V750 and DSP-AX750SE. Since DSP-AX750SE does not incorporate a tuner,
descriptions on tuning are not applicable for DSP-AX750SE. Illustrations for the RX-V750 are mainly used for explanations.
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
FEATURES
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 2 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
GETTING STARTED
3
English
INTRODUCTION
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2
Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
Notes on batteries
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases,
the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
Remote control
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China,
Asia and General models)
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
(Europe, Australia and
Korea models)
Optimizer microphone
RX-V750
Installing batteries in the remote
control
1
3
2
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 3 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you
turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4
to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound.
In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.
2 OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see
page 26).
3 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
4 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
5 A/B/C/D/E (NEXT)
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted.
[ RX-V750 ] Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A
to E) when the unit is in tuner mode.
6 PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+)
Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
A/B/C/D/E (NEXT).
[ RX-V750 ] Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the
colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the
front panel display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects
the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed.
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
(RX-V750)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
NEXT
DSP-AX750SE
LEVEL
314526 09
J
KHGEBACDF I
RDS MODE/FREQ EON
MODE
PTY SEEK
START
MNOL
78
56
(RX-V750
U.S.A. model)
(Europe model only)
Note
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 4 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5
English
INTRODUCTION
8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
(RX-V750)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO
indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off).
9 VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input
source.
0 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down
to the left and right headphone channels.
B SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
(RX-V750)
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
(LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers
and tuning.
D STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
E FM/AM
(RX-V750)
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
F PROGRAM
Use to select sound field programs or adjust the bass/treble
balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).
G TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and
right, center, presence and subwoofer channels (see
page 32).
H INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37).
I INPUT selector
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
J MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input
selector buttons on the remote control).
K PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 36).
■ RX-V750 Europe model only
L RDS MODE/FREQ
Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station
to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT
mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data
services) and/or the frequency display.
M PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode.
N PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode.
O EON
Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 5 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 65.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
3 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
4 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
5 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
6 Display window
Shows the name of the selected source component that
you can control.
7 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
level.
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / SELECT
Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or
SET MENU items.
[ RX-V750 ] Press j / i to select preset station numbers
when the unit is in tuner mode.
9 TEST (RETURN)
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
SET MENU parameters.
0 Sound field program / numeric buttons
Use to select sound field programs.
[ RX-V750 ] Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset
stations when the unit is in tuner mode.
A RE-NAME
Use to change the input source name in the display
window (see page 70).
B CLEAR
Use to clear functions acquired when using the learn and
rename features, or setting manufacturer codes (see
page 71).
C LEARN
Use to set up manufacturer codes or program functions
from other remote controls (see pages 66 and 69).
D SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
E INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37).
Remote control
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
A
B
C
D
E
G
I
J
K
L
M
N
P
H
Q
8
9
7
0
2
3
4
1
6
5
F
O
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 6 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7
English
INTRODUCTION
F MULTI CH IN
Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external
decoder (etc.).
G SELECT k/n
Selects another component that you can control
independently of the input component selected with the
input selector buttons.
H AMP
Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to
control the main unit.
I VOL –/+
Increases or decreases the volume level.
J MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.
K SET MENU (A/B/C/D/E)
Activates the SET MENU function.
[ RX-V750 ] Selects preset station groups when the unit is
in tuner mode.
L ON SCREEN
Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)
this unit sends to your video monitor.
M STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
N EX/ES
Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1-channel playback of
multi-channel software.
O NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 36).
P PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 36).
■ RX-V750 Europe model only
Q RDS tuning buttons
FREQ/RDS
Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station
to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT
mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data
services) and/or the frequency display.
EON
Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically.
PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode.
PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 7 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
■ Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– high humidity such as near a bath
– high temperature such as near a heater or stove
– extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Using the remote control
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
30 30
TRANSMIT
RE–NAME
CLEAR
LEARN
POWER SLEEP
STANDBY
INPUT MODE
SYSTEM
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
SELECT
POWER
TV
POWER
AV
AMP
REC
DISC SKIP
AUDIO
VOL
LEVEL
TITLE
TV INPUT
TV VOL
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MUTE
CH
TV MUTE
SELECT
CH
PRESET PRESET
TEST
RETURN
TV VOL
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
12
34
56
8
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC
TV THTR
MOVIE
7
90
ENTER
+10
EX/ES
THX /DTS
NIGHT
CHP/INDEX
Approximately 6 m
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 8 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9
English
INTRODUCTION
1 Decoder indicators
When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective
indicator lights up.
2 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 32).
3 NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select night listening mode.
4 Input source indicators
A cursor lights to show the current input source.
5 Sound field indicators
Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
6 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
7 AUTO indicator
(RX-V750)
Lights up when this unit is in automatic tuning mode.
8 TUNED indicator
(RX-V750)
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.
9 STEREO indicator
(RX-V750)
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
0 MEMORY indicator
(RX-V750)
Blinks to show that a station can be stored.
A MUTE indicator
Blinks while the MUTE function is on.
B VOLUME level indication
Indicates the volume level.
C PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
D VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 37).
E Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
F SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are
selected.
G SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
H HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program.
Front panel display
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
q
PL
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
LCR
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
OPTIMIZER
123456 780AB9
FG
O
HI L
JMK NEDC
(RX-V750 Europe model only)
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 9 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10
I Multi-information display
Shows the current sound field program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
J OPTIMIZER indicator
Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the
auto setup speaker settings are used without any
modifications.
K 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
L LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
M Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
N Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back
speakers when using the SPEAKER LEVEL setting (see
page 59).
O RDS indicators
(RX-V750 Europe model only)
The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently
received RDS station light(s) up.
EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON
data service is being received.
PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the
PTY SEEK mode.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 10 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11
English
INTRODUCTION
1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 17, 19 and 20 for details.
2 Audio component jacks
See page 20 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 17 and 19 for connection information.
4 Antenna terminals
See page 22 for connection information.
5 PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals
(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models)
PRESENCE speaker terminals
(other models)
See page 14 for connection information.
6 AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see
page 23).
7 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
See page 20 for details.
8 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 18 for connection information.
9 TUNER jacks
(DSP-AX750SE)
See page 20 for connection information.
0 PRE OUT jacks
See page 21 for connection information.
A Speaker terminals
See page 14 for connection information.
B IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
See page 24.
< Asia and General models only >
FREQUENCY STEP switch
See page 22.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
See page 23.
Rear panel
GND
AUDIO AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
DVD
DVD
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
OPTICAL
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
FRONT
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD
/CD-R
CD
PHONO
DVD
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
DTV
/CBL
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR PB Y
75Ω UNBAL.
FM
ANT
AM
ANT
GND
TUNER
DTV
/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
IN
DVR/
VCR 2
OUT
CENTER
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
TUNER
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
FRONT
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
A
B
CENTER
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
PRESENCE
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
CENTER SURROUND BACK
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
12 3 4 5
78
9
0A
B
6
(RX-V750)
(DSP-AX750SE)
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 11 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
SPEAKER SETUP
12
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m above the
floor.
Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm apart.
Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the
front speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
Presence speakers (PR and PL)
Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m
outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and
about 1.8 m above the floor.
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker placement
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
more than 30 cm
1.8 m
1.8 m
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 12 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
13
English
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set
this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6
ohms before using (see page 24).
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the
power of this unit is off.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do
not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
3 Unscrew the knob.
4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
■ Connecting to PRESENCE speaker
terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
Speaker connections
CAUTION
10 mm
1
2
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
3
4
5
2
1
3
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 13 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
14
SPEAKER SETUP
FRONT
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT
A
B
CENTER
PRE OUT
SURROUND
SURROUND
BACK
PRESENCE
/ZONE 2
SPEAKERS
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
231
6 7 10
98
4 5
Subwoofer
system
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back
speakers
LeftRight
LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
(RX-V750)
LeftRight
LeftRight
Presence speakers
You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.
• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only
operate when the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder is turned on.
• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields
are selected.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 14 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
15
English
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
■ FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If
you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the
FRONT A or B terminals.
■ CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
■ SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers to these terminals.
■ SUB WOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
■ SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you
only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the
left (L) terminals.
■ PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence speakers to these terminals.
1
6
7
8
9
2
3
5
4
10
Speaker layout
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 15 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
CONNECTIONS
16
Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains
power until all connections between components are
complete.
■ Cable indications
■ Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.
Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the
left jacks.
■ Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the
analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the
digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
Dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect
the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are
not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit
are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO
jacks. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 63), signals
input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the
S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise,
signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can also be
output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
VIDEO jack
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jack
For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (P
B, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO
jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
Note
CAUTION
S
V
O
V
V
V
L
R
C
left analog cables
right analog cables
optical cables
coaxial cables
video cables
S-Video cables
For analog signals
For digital signals
For video signals
Note
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Signal flow inside this unit
Only when V CONV. is set to ON
(see page 63).
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 16 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
17
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connections for DVD playback
Connecting video components
AUDIO
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
DVD
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR PB Y
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
DIGITAL
INPUT
LRC
O
DVD player
Video
monitor
(RX-V750)
Optical out
Video out
Audio out
Video in
Coaxial out
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 17 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
18
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND, left and
right SURROUND BACK and SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external
decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output.
Notes
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
LR
LR
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
BACK
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
LR LR
LR
Multi-format player/
External decoder
For 6-channel input
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Surround
back out
For 8-channel input
(RX-V750)
(RX-V750)
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 18 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
19
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connections for other video components
■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a
game console or video camera, to this unit.
AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
DVD
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DTV
/CBL
COMPONENT VIDEO
DTV
/CBL
IN
VCR 1
OUT
O
LR
LR LR
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
DVD recorder
or VCR
Audio out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out Video out
Video in
Audio in
(RX-V750)
VIDEOS VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
O
V
S
L
R
Game
console or
video
camera
Video out
Audio out L
Audio out R
Optical out
S-Video out
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 19 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
20
CONNECTIONS
■ Connections for audio components
■ Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in
the signal. However you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some record players.
■ Connecting a tuner
(DSP-AX750SE)
Connect the output jacks on your tuner to the TUNER
jacks.
Connecting audio components
GND
AUDIO AUDIO
DIGITAL
INPUT
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
OPTICAL
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD
/CD-R
CD
PHONO
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
TUNER
L
R
L
R
L
R
O
L
R
O
LR
C
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
(DSP-AX750SE)
Coaxial out
Audio out
Audio in
Optical in
Audio out
Turntable
GND
Audio out
Optical out
Tuner
Audio out
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 20 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
21
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting to an external amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.
• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, do not make connections to the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the
amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.
• The signals output through the FRONT PRE OUT and
CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE
CONTROL settings.
• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see
page 64), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE
OUT jacks.
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel line output jacks.
3 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel line output jack.
4 SURROUND BACK PRE OUT jacks
Surround back or presence channel line output jacks.
5 SUB WOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the
corresponding speaker terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level
using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker
levels” on page 53).
• Some signals may not be output from the SUB WOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 57) and
LFE/BASS OUT (see page 58) settings.
Notes
Notes
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
PRE OUT
FRONT
R
L
SURROUND
BACK
123
5
4
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 21 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
22
CONNECTIONS
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it
to the terminals on this unit.
2 Press and hold the tab to
insert the AM loop antenna
lead wires into the AM ANT
and GND terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna
for the best reception.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
■ FREQUENCY STEP switch
(Asia and General models only)
Because the interstation frequency
spacing differs in different areas, set
the FREQUENCY STEP switch
(locating on the rear panel) according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
• North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz
• Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s power
cord from the AC wall outlet.
Connecting the antennas (RX-V750)
75
Ω
UNBAL.
FM
ANT
AM
ANTGND
TUNER
AM loop antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna
GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
Notes
FREQUENCY STEP
10
K
H
Z
/ 100
K
H
Z
9
K
H
Z
/ 50
K
H
Z
FMAM
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 22 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
23
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting the AC power cord
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models .............................. 1 OUTLET
Korea model .............................................................. None
Other models ................................................. 2 OUTLETS
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
other components to this unit. Power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s)
supply power to any connected component whenever this
unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power
consumption of components) that can be connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) is:
China, Asia and General models .............................. 50 W
Korea model ................................................................ N/A
Other models ........................................................... 100 W
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
Asia model ......................... 220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
General model ...... 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
■ Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost.
Connecting the power supply cord
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models)
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 23 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
24
CONNECTIONS
■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Do not change the setting of the IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on,
as doing so may damage the unit.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed
on either the front panel or remote control, the
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to
either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the
way to either position when this unit is in standby mode.
Select the switch position (left or right) according to the
impedance of the speakers in your system.
CAUTION
SET BEFORE POWER ON
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Switch position Speaker Impedance level
Left
Front
If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be
4 Ω or higher.
If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be
8 Ω or higher.
The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.
Center, Surround, Surround back,
Presence
Right
Front
If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be
8 Ω or higher.
If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be
16 Ω or higher.
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
Center, Surround, Surround back,
Presence
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 24 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
25
English
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power of this
unit.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Turning on the power
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
1
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
1
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
SYSTEM
POWER
or
Front panel
Remote control
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 25 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
AUTO SETUP
26
This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you
avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and
achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound
your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the auto setup procedure.
• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,
follow the troubleshooting on page 30.
YPAO performs the following checks and makes
appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible
sound from your system.
WIRING/LEVEL:
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of
each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the sound level
(volume) of each speaker so that the sound level of each
speaker is the same when heard from the listening
position.
DISTANCE/PHASE:
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening
position and adjusts the delay of each channel so that the
sound from each speaker reaches the listening position at
the same time. Also checks the phase of each speaker.
SIZE:
Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the
crossover/high cut frequency for the subwoofer to improve
the sound relationship between the speakers and the
subwoofer.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
• After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to
disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.
– Keep it away from direct sunlight.
– Do not place it on top of this unit.
2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat
level surface with the omni-directional
microphone head upward, at your normal
listening position.
If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
mic at the same height as your ears would be when
you are seated in your listening position.
AUTO SETUP
Introduction
Notes
Optimizer microphone setup
Notes
AMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
T
U
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
Y
BA
INPUT
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
Optimizer microphone position
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 26 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
27
English
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too
much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
y
If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut
frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as
viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high
cut frequency to the maximum.
1 Switch on this unit and your video monitor.
Make sure the OSD is displayed.
2 Press AMP.
3 Press SET MENU.
4 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP.
5 Press SELECT to enter AUTO SETUP.
6 Press u / d to select SETUP, then press j / i
to select the desired setting.
AUTO To perform the auto setup procedure
(YPAO).
RELOAD To reload the last auto setup (YPAO)
settings to override any manual
changes.
UNDO To undo the last auto setup (YPAO) and
restore the previous settings.
DEFAULT To restore the factory preset (default)
setup parameters.
y
You can choose RELOAD or UNDO only if you have
already performed auto setup.
7 Press d to select START, then press SELECT
to start the setup procedure.
• If you selected AUTO in step 6, loud test tones will
be output from each speaker in turn; WAIT appears
during the auto setup procedure.
• If you selected DEFAULT, RELOAD or UNDO in
step 6, no test tones are output.
The RESULT:WIRING screen appears after all items
have been measured and set.
• If an ERROR screen appears, see “If an error
screen appears” on page 28.
• If a WARNING screen appears, see “If a warning
screen appears” on page 29.
Starting the setup
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer
AMP
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
SET MENU
.;AUTOSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
1 AUTO:MENU
. SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
START
Automatic
processing
of all items
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
1 AUTO:MENU
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
.START
Automatic
processing
of all items
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Start
p
p
FRONT
L;;;;;;;OK
[<]/[>]:Select
[SELECT]:Return
RESULT:WIRING
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 27 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
28
AUTO SETUP
8 Use the cursor buttons to display the results.
• Press u / d to display information about
individual results.
• Press j / i to switch between each result list.
9 When finished, press SELECT.
The RESULT:EXIT screen appears.
10 Press u / d to select SET or CANCEL.
SET To apply the auto setup (YPAO)
settings.
CANCEL To cancel the auto setup (YPAO)
without making any changes.
11 Press SELECT to set or cancel the auto
setup settings.
y
If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust
each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see
page 55).
• If E-10 appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3.
• To cancel the auto setup procedure before completion, press
SET MENU.
■ If an error screen appears
1 Press SELECT to display detailed
information about the error.
2 Press j / i to switch between error
messages.
For details about each message, see page 30.
3 When finished, press SELECT to return to
the main error screen.
4 Press u / d to select RETRY or EXIT, then
press SELECT.
RETRY To retry the auto setup procedure.
EXIT To exit auto setup.
Notes
FRONT
L;;;;;;;OK
[<]/[>]:Select
[SELECT]:Return
RESULT:WIRING
RESULT:EXIT
NOWARNING
RESULTLIST
.)SETCANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
ERROR
.E-5:NOISY
)RETRYEXIT
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
ERROR: E-5
<
NOISY
>
Keep
SILENT
[SELECT]:Return
ERROR
E-5:NOISY
.)RETRY
EXIT
[
]/[
]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 28 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
29
English
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
■ If a warning screen appears
1 Press j / i to display detailed information
about each warning.
For details about each message, see page 30.
y
Warnings let you know about potential problems detected
during auto setup. Warnings will not cancel the auto setup.
2 When you are finished, press SELECT.
The RESULT:EXIT screen appears.
3 Press u / d to select RESULT LIST, then
press SELECT.
The RESULT:WIRING screen appears.
Continue from step 8 on page 28 to display
each result.
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate
your system.
• If SWFR PHASE:REV appears in RESULT:WIRING, the SET
MENU “SUBWOOFER PHASE” parameter is automatically
set to REVERSE (see page 59).
• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer.
Notes
WARNING:W-1
<OUTOFPHASE>
ReverseChannel
FLFR
--
----
----
----
[<]/[>]:Select
[SELECT]:Return
RESULT:EXIT
WARNINGLIST
.RESULTLIST
)SETCANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
FRONT
L;;;;;REV.
[<]/[>]:Select
[SELECT]:Return
RESULT:WIRING
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 29 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
30
AUTO SETUP
■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure
Before auto setup
Errors during auto setup
Press SELECT to display detailed information about individual errors. Press j / i to switch between error messages.
Warnings after auto setup
Press j / i to display detailed information about individual warnings.
• If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again.
• If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.
• If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.
Error message Cause Remedy
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not
detected.
• Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B.
• Check the front left and right speaker connections.
E-2:NO SURR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.
E-3:NO PRES. SP
A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT
SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
E-5:NOISY
Background noise is too loud. • Try the auto setup procedure in a quiet environment.
• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners
(etc.) or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.
E-6:CHECK SURR.
Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
• Connect surround speakers when you use (a)
surround back speaker(s).
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the auto setup procedure.
• Do not touch the optimizer microphone during the
auto setup procedure.
E-8:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not detect test
tones.
• Check the microphone setting.
• Check the speaker connections and placement.
E-9:USER CANCEL
The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to
user activity.
• Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not adjust
VOLUME (etc.) during the auto setup procedure.
E-10:OTHER ERROR
A DSP communication error or hangup
occurred.
• Perform the auto setup procedure again.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message
may appear depending on the speakers even
when the speakers are connected correctly.
• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ or –).
W-2:OVER 24m
(80ft)
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m.
• Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among speakers
is excessive. (No level correction is made.)
• Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers
are set in locations with similar conditions.
• Check the speaker connections.
• Use speakers of similar quality and efficiency.
• Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 30 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
PLAYBACK
31
English
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.
Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.
4 Select the input source.
Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons
on the remote control) to select the input you desire.
The current input source name and input mode appear
in the front panel display and video monitor for a few
seconds.
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operating instructions for the component.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
PLAYBACK
Basic operations
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
1 7 43
6
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
1
6
7
4
7
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
SYSTEM
POWER
Front panel Remote control
or
SPEAKERS
B
A
INPUT
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
01DDVD D AUTOO00
PHONO
Selected input source
Input mode
VOLUME
VOL
+
–
or
Remote control
Front panel
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 31 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
32
PLAYBACK
7 Select a sound field program if desired.
Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP
mode, then press one of the sound field program
buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program.
See page 48 for details about sound field programs.
To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT
CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When
activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI
CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
• “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or
the 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the tonal quality
of your front left and right,
center, presence and subwoofer
speakers or headphones (when
connected).
Press TONE CONTROL on the
front panel repeatedly to select
TREBLE or BASS, then rotate
PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease.
• Select TREBLE to adjust the
high frequency response.
• Select BASS to adjust the low frequency response.
To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly to select BYPASS.
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
TONE CONTROL is not effective during playback in the PURE
DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected
(page 36).
To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator blinks in the
front panel display.
To resume the audio output, press
MUTE again (or press VOL –/+).
The MUTE indicator disappears
from the display.
y
You can adjust the muting level (see page 60).
Notes
PROGRAM
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHT
q
/DTS
PURE DIRECT
CHP/INDEX
AMP
Remote control
Front panel
or
Note
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MUTE
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 32 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
33
English
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT
Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”
appears in the front panel display and video monitor.
MULTI CH INPUT
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH
INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel
display.
■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Use the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source, then select an
audio source.
If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
together with a video source, first select the video source, then
press MULTI CH INPUT.
■ Front panel operation
Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
Note
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
Audio sources
Video sources
Selecting sound field programs
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
PROGRAM
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
01DJAZZA CLUBO00
Program name
PROGRAM
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 33 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
34
PLAYBACK
■ Remote control operation
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
one of the sound field program buttons
repeatedly to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display.
y
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,
and not on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH
INPUT is selected.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/
24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field
programs will be applied.
■ Enjoying multi-channel software
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital
Surround EX or DTS-ES decoders.
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
EX/ES on the remote control to switch between
5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly when
PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed.
AUTO (AUTO)
When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is
input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing
back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in
the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/
7.1 channels.
Decoders (select with j / i)
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the software you are playing.
PLIIxMovie
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.
PLIIxMusic
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.
EX/ES
For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the
DTS-ES decoder.
EX
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.
OFF (OFF)
Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.
y
When “SURR B L/R SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see
page 58), the surround back channel will be output from the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Notes
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
Sound field
program
buttons
AMP
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
01DJAZZA CLUBO00
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHT
q
/DTS
PURE DIRECT
CHP/INDEX
AMP
Program name
ENTER
EX/ES
CHP/INDEX
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 34 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
35
English
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)
which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these
kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder (PLIIx Movie,
PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually.
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in
the following cases:
– When “SURR L/R SP” (see page 57) or “SURR B L/R SP”
(see page 58) is set to NONE.
– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is
being played.
– When the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– When “2ch Stereo” or PURE DIRECT is selected.
• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be
reset to AUTO.
• When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you
cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B L/R
SP” is set to NONE (see page 58).
• PLIIxMovie cannot be selected when “SURR B L/R SP” is set
to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 58).
■ Enjoying 2-channel software
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multiple channels.
Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the
decoder.
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the type of software you are playing and your personal
preference.
PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround
sources.
PRO LOGIC IIx Movie
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.
PRO LOGIC IIx Game
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.
DTS Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
DTS Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
*
Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro
Logic IIx decoders (see page 78).
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B L/R
SP” is set to NONE (see page 58).
Notes
Note
/DTS
9
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 35 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
36
PLAYBACK
■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
(PURE DIRECT)
PURE DIRECT allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders
and DSP processors, and turn off the video circuitry and
front panel display to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from
analog and PCM sources.
Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct.
The indicator around the front panel button lights up.
y
The front panel display switches on momentarily when an
operation is performed.
To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.
The indicator around the front panel button goes out and
the previous settings are restored.
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input.
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• The following operations are not possible during PURE
DIRECT operation:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
– adjusting SET MENU parameters
– all video functions (video conversion etc.)
• PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is
set to the standby mode.
■ Night listening modes
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the
type of material you are playing.
Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to
select cinema or music.
When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in
the front panel display lights up.
• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources
to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.
Press j / i to adjust the effect level while
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
This adjusts the level of compression.
• Select MIN for minimum compression.
• Select MID for standard compression.
• Select MAX for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored
independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT
or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT indicator lights
up when PURE DIRECT is selected).
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
Notes
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
0
Front panel Remote control
or
Notes
Remote control
NIGHT
+10
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 36 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
37
English
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Downmixing to 2 channels
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-
channel sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the
remote control) to select 2ch Stereo.
2ch Stereo
y
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or
BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”.
■ Listening to unprocessed input signals
In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are
output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.
STRAIGHT
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the display when you want to turn the
sound effect back on.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA
DSP activates automatically whenever you select a
CINEMA DSP sound field program.
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SURR L/R
SP” is set to NONE (see page 57) in the following cases:
– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
1 Rotate INPUT to select the input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.
In most cases, use AUTO.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) Digital signals
*
2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound
field program.
y
You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the
power is turned on (see page 62).
Note
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHT
q
/DTS
PURE DIRECT
CHP/INDEX
Front panel
or
PROGRAM
Remote control
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
Front panel
Remote control
or
Selecting input modes
INPUT
INPUT MODE
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
01DDVD D AUTOO00
PHONO
Input modeInput source
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 37 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
38
PLAYBACK
• When you play DTS-encoded CD/LDs with the input mode set
to AUTO:
– This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode.
The unit remains in DTS mode (and the t indicator may
flash) for up to 30 seconds after playback of the DTS source is
complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT
MODE to reselect AUTO.
– The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip
operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To
prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS.
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
Displaying information about the input
source
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1 Select the input source.
2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then
press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) so that
“STRAIGHT” appears in the display.
STRAIGHT
3 Press u / d to display the following
information about the input signal.
(Format) Signal format display. When the unit
cannot detect a digital signal it
automatically switches to analog input.
in Number of source channels in the input
signal. For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2
surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/LFE”.
fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is
unable to detect the sampling
frequency “Unknown” appears.
rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to
detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.
flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby
Digital signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
Notes
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
AMP
then
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 38 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
TUNING (RX-V750)
39
English
BASIC
OPERATION
There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
■ Automatic tuning
1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input
source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l
to tune into a lower frequency.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown in the front panel display.
TUNING (RX-V750)
Automatic and manual tuning
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
3 312 4
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
INPUT
FM/AM
or
AM
FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
AUTO
Lights up
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
R
/VCR2
T CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO ME
M
SLEEP
T
UAL
A B
SP
A
1
-AAM1 1440k kHz
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
R
/VCR2
T CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO ME
M
SLEEP
T
UAL
A B
SP
A
1
-AAM1 1530k kHz
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 39 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
40
TUNING (RX-V750)
■ Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station
will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception
to increase the signal quality.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 as described in
“Automatic tuning”.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from
the front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue searching.
■ Automatically presetting FM stations
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through
E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
AUTO
Disappears
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
R
/VCR2
T CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO ME
M
SLEEP
T
UAL
A B
SP
A
1
-AAM1 1440k kHz
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
Presetting stations
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
231
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
FM/AM
FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
AUTO
Lights up
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
TUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
R
/VCR2
T CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO ME
M
SLEEP
T
UAL
A B
SP
A
1
-AAM1 1440k kHz
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 40 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
41
English
TUNING (RX-V750)
BASIC
OPERATION
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
presetting starts from the frequency currently
displayed and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually,
and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting
stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies.
After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward the lower frequencies.
■ Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations in 5 groups,
A1 through E8) manually.
1 Tune into a station.
See page 39 for tuning instructions.
When tuned into a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
A1 1:FM1 87.5k MHz
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
43 2,5
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
A11:AM18630k kHz
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
Flashes
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
C11:AM18630k kHz
Preset group
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 41 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
42
TUNING (RX-V750)
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 through 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
When performing this operation with the remote
control, first press TUNER to set the remote to
tuner mode.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station
group.
The preset group letter appears in the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i
on the remote control) to select a preset
station number (1 through 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
Notes
LEVEL
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
C1 3:AM18630k kHz
Preset number
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
C1 3:AM18630k kHz
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
Selecting preset stations
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
2
1
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
1
2
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
or
Front panel Remote control
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO
M
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
9
E1 1:FM1 87.5k MHz
or
Front panel
Remote control
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 42 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
43
English
TUNING (RX-V750)
BASIC
OPERATION
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Exchanging preset stations
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
2,4 1,31,3
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO
M
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
9
E1 1:FM1 87.5k MHz
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO
M
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
9
A1 5:FM1 90.6k MHz
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
CDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO
M
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
9
E1 EDIT18E1-A5Hz
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 43 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
44
TUNING (RX-V750)
RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system
used by FM stations in many countries. The RDS function
is carried out among the network stations.
This unit can receive various RDS data such as PS
(Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio
Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other
Networks) when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.
■ PS (Program Service name) mode:
The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.
■ PTY (Program Type) mode:
There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.
■ RT (Radio Text) mode:
Information about the program (such as the title of the
song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being
received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other
characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with
under-bars.
■ CT (Clock Time) mode:
The current time is displayed and updated every minute.
If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may
appear.
■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks):
See “EON function” on the following page.
Four modes are available for displaying RDS data. The
PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that correspond to the
RDS data services offered by the station light up in the
front panel display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ (or FREQ/
RDS on the remote control) repeatedly to display the
various RDS data offered by the transmitting station as
shown below.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, first
press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
• Do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until an RDS indicator lights
up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if
you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has
not finished receiving all of the RDS data from the station.
• RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.
• This unit cannot utilize the RDS data source if the signal
received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode
requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT
mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY,
etc.) are displayed.
• RDS data may not be received under poor reception conditions.
In such cases, press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator disappears from the front panel display. Although this
will change the reception mode to manual, RDS data may be
displayed when you change the display to RDS mode.
• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference
during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service
may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear in the front
panel display.
Receiving RDS stations
NEWS News
AFFAIRS Current affairs
INFO General information
SPORT Sports
EDUCATE Education
DRAMA Drama
CULTURE Culture
SCIENCE Science
VARIED Light entertainment
POP M Pops
ROCK M Rock
M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music
(easy-listening)
LIGHT M Light classics
CLASSICS Serious classics
OTHER M Other music
Changing the RDS mode
Notes
RDS MODE/FREQ
FREQ/RDS
PS
PTY
RT
CT
Frequency display
or
Front panel
Remote control
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 44 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
45
English
TUNING (RX-V750)
BASIC
OPERATION
If you select the desired program type, this unit
automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are
broadcasting a program of the required type.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, first
press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the
PTY SEEK mode.
The program type of the station being received or
“NEWS” flashes in the front panel display.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or
PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select
the desired program type.
The selected program type appears in the front panel
display.
3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching
all preset RDS stations.
The selected program type flashes and the PTY
HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display
while searching for stations.
• The unit stops searching when it finds a station
broadcasting the selected type of program.
• If the found station is not the one you desire, press
PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes
searching for another station broadcasting the same
type of program.
■ To cancel this function
Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.
PTY SEEK function
RDS MODE/FREQ EON
MODE
PTY SEEK
START
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
213
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
2
1,3
(RX-V750 Europe model)
MODE
PTY SEEK
START
STARTMODE
PTY SEEK
Flashes
or
Front panel
Remote control
LEVEL
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
POP M
Front panel
or
Remote control
PTY HOLD
MODE
PTY SEEK
START
STARTMODE
PTY SEEK
Lights up
or
Front panel
Remote control
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 45 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
46
TUNING (RX-V750)
This function uses the EON data service on the RDS
station network. If you select the desired program type
(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit
automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are
scheduled to broadcast the selected type of program and
switches from the station currently being received to the
new station when the broadcast starts.
This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers
the EON data service is being received. When such a station is
being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
1 Check that the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another
RDS station so that the EON indicator lights up.
2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired
program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or
SPORT).
The selected program type name appears in the front
panel display.
• If a preset RDS station type starts broadcasting the
selected type of program, the unit automatically
switches from the program being received to that
program. (EON indicator flashes.)
• When broadcasting of the selected program ends,
the unit returns to the previous station (or another
program on the same station).
■ To cancel this function
Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is
shown in the front panel display.
EON function
Note
RDS MODE/FREQ EON
EON
or
Front panel
Remote control
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 46 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
RECORDING
47
English
BASIC
OPERATION
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operating instructions for those components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SPEAKER
LEVEL” (page 59) and programs does not affect recorded
material.
• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• S-Video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-Video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-Video (or only a
composite video) signal to your VCR.
• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not
output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.
Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are
not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your
source component is connected to provide only digital (or
analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
■ Special considerations when recording
DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player
is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.
RECORDING
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
12
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
1
2
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
INPUT
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel Remote control
Notes
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 47 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
48
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 37) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Notes
For movie/video sources
Program Features Sources
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel (left and right) or plays back 2-channel sources
as is.
MULTI
2-CH
MUSIC VIDEO
This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at
an actual jazz or rock concert.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Game
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
TV THEATER:
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presernce
sound field.
TV THEATER:
Variety/Sports
Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the
sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching
various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.
MOVIE THEATER:
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm
movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the
sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
MOVIE THEATER:
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the
latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space
amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
MOVIE THEATER:
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of
the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to
that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained
as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER:
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multi-
channel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 48 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
49
English
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
MULTI
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.
q D+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for Dolby Digital sources.
q D+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for Dolby
Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital
sources.
DTS:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1-channel processing for DTS sources.
DTS 96/24:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1-channel processing for 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for DTS sources.
DTS+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for DTS
sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Disc6.1:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Disc6.1:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
Program Features Sources
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 49 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
50
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
*
You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 78.
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
2-CH
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
*
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.
*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.
*
DTS: Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
Program Features Sources
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 50 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
51
English
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
*
You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 78.
For music sources
Program Features Sources
CONCERT HALL
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,
rich sound.
MULTI
2-CH
JAZZ CLUB
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous
New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering
a real and vibrant sound.
ROCK CONCERT
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this
program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left
of the hall.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-
energy, “immediate” sound.
q D+PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
MULTI
q D+PLIIx Music:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
2-channel (left and right) playback.
2-CH
STEREO:
7ch Stereo
Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.
*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.
*
DTS: Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 51 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
52
You can display this unit’s operating information on a
video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound
field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much
easier to see the available options and parameters than it is
by reading this information on the front panel display.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the
OSD mode.
The OSD mode changes in the
following order: full display, short
display, and display off.
Full display
Always shows the sound field program parameter settings
as well as the contents of the front panel display.
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the
bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.
Display off
Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are
displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU
or the test tone feature, even if the OSD mode is set to
“Display off”.
• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will
not be recorded.
• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a
video source is not being reproduced (or the source component
is turned off) by using “DISPLAY SET” (see page 63).
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S).
■ Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set
the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front
panel display changes as shown
below. The SLEEP indicator flashes
while switching the amount of time
for the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Selecting the OSD mode
Notes
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
P08
MOVIE THEATER
.General
DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;15ms
P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;20ms
S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
P08MOVIETHEATER
General
Full display Short display
Using the sleep timer
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
2
SLEEP
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
E1 SLEEP8 120minz
PHONOCDTUNER
MD/CD-R
DVD
HiFi DSP
DTV/CBL
V-AUXVCR1
DVR/VCR2
96
24
q
PL
q
EX
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA NIGHT
ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
PS RT CT EONPTY
TUNED STEREO MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q
PL
q
PL x
A B
SP
ft
mS
dB
dB
96/24
LFE
L C R
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
E1 CONCERT2 HALLz
SLEEP indicator
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 52 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
53
English
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in
the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the
SLEEP indicator goes off.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front
panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Please note that this operation will override the level
adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26),
“SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 59) and “Using the test tone”
(page 54).
1 Press AMP.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker you want to adjust.
FRONT L Front left speaker level
CENTER Center speaker level
FRONT R Front right speaker level
SUR.R Surround right speaker level
SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker level
SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker level
SUR.L Surround left speaker level
SWFR Subwoofer level
PRES Presence speaker level
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by
pressing u / d.
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
4 Press SELECT when you have completed
your adjustment.
y
This operation can also be performed using the controls on the
front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you
want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level.
SLEEP
SLEEP OFF
Manually adjusting speaker levels
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
1
3
2
4
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 53 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
54
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your
speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override
the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26),
“SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 59) and “Manually adjusting
speaker levels” (page 53). Use the test tone to set speaker
levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical
when heard from your listening position.
You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to
the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES
jack.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press TEST.
The unit outputs a test tone.
3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker
you want to adjust.
TEST LEFT Front left speaker
TEST CENTER Center speaker
TEST RIGHT Front right speaker
TEST SUR.R Right surround speaker
TEST SUR.B.R Right surround back speaker
TEST SUR.B.L Left surround back speaker
TEST SUR.L Left surround speaker
TEST SUBWOOFER Subwoofer
4 Press j / i to adjust the speaker volumes.
5 Press TEST when you have completed your
adjustment.
The test tone stops.
If PRESENCE SP in “SPEAKER SET” is set to YES,
you can adjust the presence speaker volumes
(proceed to step 6).
■ Outputting the test tone from the
PRESENCE speakers
6 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker
from which you want to output the test tone.
TEST FRONT Front speakers
TEST PRESENCE Presence speakers
TEST PRES L Left presence speakers
TEST PRES R Right presence speakers
7 Press j / i to adjust the presence speaker
volumes.
8 Press TEST when you have completed your
adjustment.
The test tone stops.
Using the test tone
Note
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
1
3,6
2,5,8
4,7
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 54 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
SET MENU
55
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ AUTO SETUP
Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26).
■ MANUAL SETUP
Use to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
1 SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for
video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
y
Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). You can use SOUND
MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first
.
2 INPUT MENU
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs.
3 OPTION MENU
Use to adjust the optional system parameters.
SET MENU
Item Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over
frequency.
57
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
59
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
59
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
60
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
60
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
60
G)AUDIO SET
Customizes the muting level, audio delay and height of the front and center channel sounds.
60
H)PR/SB SELECT
Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are
connected to this unit.
61
Item Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
61
B)INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
62
C)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the inputs.
62
Item Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.
63
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.
63
C)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
64
D)ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
64
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 55 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
56
SET MENU
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is
reproducing sound.
You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit
is in either cinema or music night listening mode.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press SET MENU.
3 Press u / d to select MANUAL SETUP.
4 Press SELECT to enter MANUAL SETUP.
1 SOUND MENU appears on the front panel display.
5 Press u / d to select the desired menu.
6 Press SELECT to enter the selected menu.
7 Press u / d to select the item you want to
adjust, then press j / i to change the setting
of the item.
Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting.
To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.
8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.
Using SET MENU
Note
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHT
q
/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
1
2,8
3-7
AMP
MENU
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
SET MENU
;AUTOSETUP
.;MANUALSETUP
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
;MANUAL SETUP
.1SOUNDMENU
2INPUTMENU
3OPTIONMENU
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)CENTERGEQ
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
-+
.FR
C
SL
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
MENU
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 56 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
57
English
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate
for video signal processing delays when using LCD
monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU
parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup
(see page 26).
■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
• Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS
OUT”.
• Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit
directs the entire range of the center channel signal to
the center speaker.
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS
OUT”.
• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.
This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 37) and automatically set the surround
back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP) to NONE.
• Select SML if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select LRG if you have large surround left and right
speakers. The entire range of the surround channel
signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
1 SOUND MENU
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)CENTERGEQ
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
p
p
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
NONE)SMLLRG
CENTER SP
SMALL)LARGE
FRONT SP
NONE)SMLLRG
SURR L/R SP
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 57 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
58
SET MENU
Surround back speakers SURR B L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2
• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency
signals are directed to the left surround back speaker.
• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channels are directed to the speakers selected with
“LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back
speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the left surround back
speaker.
• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back
speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back
speakers.
If you select SMLx1 or LRGx1, connect the speaker to the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Presence speakers PRESENCE SP
Choices: NONE, YES
• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.
• Select YES if you have presence speakers.
Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the
subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers
according to the characteristics of your system. This
setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS
sources.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.
• Select FRNT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and
low frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the front speakers according to the speaker settings
(even if you have previously set front speakers to
SML).
• Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want
to output low-frequency signals from front channels to
both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-
frequency signals from other channels are also directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use
this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using
the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.
Cross over CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Note
SMLx1)SMLx2
SURR B L/R SP
)NONEYES
PRESENCE SP
SWFRFRNT)BOTH
LFE/BASS OUT
FREQ;;;80Hz
CROSS OVER
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 58 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
59
English
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to
switch the phase of your subwoofer.
Choices: NORMAL (normal), REVERSE (reverse)
• Select NORMAL if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 57).
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
• FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right
speakers.
• C adjusts the balance of the front left and center
speakers.
• SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround
left speakers.
• SBL
*
adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround back left speakers.
• SBR
*
adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround back right speakers.
• SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround right speakers.
• SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and
subwoofer.
• PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence
speakers.
*
SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back
speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 58).
y
To calibrate, use the test tone feature (see page 54).
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)
Other models: meters (m)
• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m
• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m
• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m
• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m
• SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m
• SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m
• SB L
*
adjusts the distance of the surround back left
speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m
• SB R
*
adjusts the distance of the surround back right
speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m
• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial
setting: 3.0 m
• PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m
• PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m
*
SURR B will be displayed if you selected only one surround
back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 58).
)NORMALREVERSE
02ASUBWOOFER PHASE
-+
.FR
C
SL
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
FRONTL;;;;3.00m
FRONTR;;;;3.00m
CENTER;;;;;3.00m
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
p
p
C)SP
DISTANCE
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 59 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
60
SET MENU
■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers.
You can make adjustments listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
You can adjust 5 frequency bands: 100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz,
3kHz, 10kHz
Choices: –6 to +6 dB
• Select ON to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
• Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the
currently selected source component.
• Press u / d to select a frequency band.
• Press j / i to adjust the selected frequency band.
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-
frequency special effects which are only added to certain
scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Choices: –20 to 0 dB
Speaker SPEAKER
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE LEVEL”, some signals may
not be output from the SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack.
■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is
effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and
DTS signals.
Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX
(maximum)
Speaker SP
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
• Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels.
• Select STD for general use.
• Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
■ Audio set G)AUDIO SET
Use to customize this units overall audio settings.
Audio mute AUDIO MUTE
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: MUTE, –20 dB
• Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound.
• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 160 ms
Note
.TEST)OFFON
-+
100Hz0dB
300Hz0dB
1kHz0dB
3kHz0dB
10kHz0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
D)CENTER GEQ
p
p
.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
p
p
E)LFE
LEVEL
.SP:MINSTD)MAX
HP:MINSTD)MAX
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
.AUDIOMUTE;;MUTE
AUDIODELAY;;0ms
DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Selet
p
p
G)AUDIO SET
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 60 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
61
English
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT
Use to turn on and off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see
page 78). This parameter adjusts the height of the front
and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by
assigning some of the front and center channel elements to
the presence speakers.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select OFF to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect.
• Select ON to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect.
“DIALG.LIFT” appears only when “PRESENCE SP” is set to
YES (see page 58).
■ Presence/surround back channel select
H)PR/SB SELECT
You can select to prioritize either the surround back or
presence speakers when playing sources that contain
surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound
field programs.
Choices: PRch, SBch
• Select PRch to use presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from
surround speakers.
• Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a
surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA
DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output
from front speakers.
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode
or rename your inputs.
■ Input/output assignment A)I/O
ASSIGNMENT
You can assign jacks according to the component to be
used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your
needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the
respective jacks and effectively connect more components.
Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using INPUT on the front
panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A and B
Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVR/VCR2
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1
Choices: MD/CD-R, TUNER (DSP-AX750SE), CD,
V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVD, PHONO, DVR/VCR2
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4
Choices: CD, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVD, PHONO,
DVR/VCR2, MD/CD-R, TUNER (DSP-AX750SE)
Note
PRch)SBch
[]/[]:Select
[SELECT]:Return
p
p
H)PR/SB
SELECT
2 INPUT MENU
.A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUTMODE
C)INPUTRENAME
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
2
INPUT
MENU
p
p
.[A];;;;;DVD
(DVD)
[B];;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL)
CMPNT-V
INPUT
.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )
OPTICAL
OUT
.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R)
(3);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(4);;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )
OPTICAL
IN
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 61 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
62
SET MENU
For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6
Choices: TUNER (DSP-AX750SE), CD, V-AUX,
DTV/CBL, VCR 1, MD/CD-R, DVD, PHONO,
DVR/VCR2
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on
this unit (see page 37 for details about the input mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect
the type of input signal and select the appropriate input
mode.
• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the
last input mode used for that source.
Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button
will not be recalled.
■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the
OSD and front panel display.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.
2 Press AMP.
3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
4 Press u / d to select the character you want,
then use j / i to move to the next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press d to change the character in the following
order, or press u to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *,
+, etc.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each
input.
6 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.
Notes
Note
.(5);;;;; CD
(CD)
(6);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
COAXIAL
IN
)AUTOLAST
[<]/[>]:Select
[SELECT]:Return
B)INPUT
MODE
DVD->DVD
[<]/[>]:Position
[]/[]:Chara.
C)INPUT
RENAME
p
p
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 62 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
63
English
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
Video conversion V CONV.
Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite
(VIDEO) signals to both S-Video and component signals.
This allows you to output converted video signals from the
S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no
S-Video or component signals are input. This feature also
converts S-Video signals to component signals when no
component signals are input.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select OFF not to convert any signals.
• Select ON to convert composite signals to S-Video and
component signals, and to convert S-Video signals to
component signals.
• Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video
connections (i.e., S-Video) between each component.
• When converting composite video or S-Video signals from a
VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)
• Press + to lower the position of the OSD.
• Press – to raise the position of the OSD.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays
a gray background when there’s no video signal input.
Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be displayed
on the screen when video signals are not being input.
Component OSD CMPNT OSD
Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when
using the SET MENU, test tone or parameter functions.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select ON to output the OSD signals from
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD
signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
Set menu functions even when OFF is selected.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
Select ON to protect:
• DSP program parameters
• All SET MENU items
• All speaker levels
• The on-screen display (OSD) mode
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test
tone or select any other SET MENU items.
3 OPTION MENU
Notes
.A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORYGUARD
C)PARAM.INI
D)ZONESET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[SELECT]:Enter
3
OPTION
MENU1/2
p
p
.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
VCONV;;;;;;;;ON
OSDSHIFT;;;;;;0
GRAYBACK;;;AUTO
CMPNTOSD;;;;;ON
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:sELECT
A)DISPLAY
SET
p
p
Note
Note
Note
)OFFON
[<]/[>]:Select
[SELECT]:Return
B)MEMORY
GUARD
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 63 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
64
SET MENU
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field
program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound
field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the
parameter values have been changed from their initial
settings.
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a
sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual
sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to ON.
■ Zone set D)ZONE SET
Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals.
Speaker B set SP B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is
turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit
when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both
headphones and SPEAKERS B.
• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B,
the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Notes
1234
567*8
9
C)PARAM.
INI
Notes
SPB;;;;;;FRONT
[<]/[>]:Select
[SELECT]:Return
D)ZONE
SET
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 64 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
65
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and
other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer
codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote
controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.
■ Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
after pressing AMP to activate the AMP mode.
Fixing the remote to AMP mode
You can fix the remote permanently to AMP mode (fixed AMP
mode) so that the shaded areas above always control this unit.
This is useful, if you primarily want to use the remote control in
AMP mode. To fix AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3
seconds so that “A:___” appears in the display window.
To temporarily switch to component control mode, press AMP.
To cancel fixed AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3
seconds.
■ Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected component. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected
component appears in the display window.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Control area
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
The buttons in the
dotted lines control
this unit in any
mode. (SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, INPUT
MODE, MULTI CH
IN, VOLUME +/–
and MUTE)
Press AMP
to control
this unit.
Fixed AMP mode
Component control mode
A:DVD DVD
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
CHP/INDEX
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MENUTITLE
CH CH
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
CHP/INDEX
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
A/B buttons and the input
selector buttons switch the
function of the component
control area below.
*
Use the A/B buttons to
control other components
regardless of whether they
are connected to this unit.
Factory setting:
A...LD player
B...CD recorder
SELECT k/n switches
control to another
component without
changing the input source
on this unit.
Component control
area
You can control up to 11
different components by
setting appropriate
manufacturer codes (see
page 66).
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 65 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
66
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area.
The following table shows the factory preset component
(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code
for each area.
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s).
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to set up.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
“SETUP” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3
seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
If you want to change a library (component
category), press j / i. You can set a different
type of component.
Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD,
L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*,
L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR
* The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “YPC”
to operate this unit. However, you can switch between the
following two codes if necessary.
• The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “YPC”.
YPC To operate this unit.
ZONE (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)
To operate ZONE 2 features.
3 Press u / d to select the name of your
component’s manufacturer.
You will find the names of most worldwide audio-
video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the
display window.
Setting manufacturer codes
Input area
Component
category
(Library)
Manufacturer
ALD
Yamaha (U.K. and Europe models)
Yamaha-1 (Other models)
B CD-R Yamaha
PHONO TV –
V-AUX VCR –
TUNER TUNER
Yamaha-3 (U.K. and Europe models)
Yamaha-1 (Other models)
MD/CD-R MD Yamaha-1
CD CD Yamaha-1
DTV/CBL TV –
VCR 1 VCR –
DVR/VCR2 DVR Yamaha
DVD DVD Yamaha-1
Note
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
LEARN
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 66 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
67
English
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to
see if you can control your component. If you
can, the manufacturer code is correct.
y
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
codes, try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you continuously want to set up a code for another
component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1,
3 and 4.
5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible
manufacturer codes for commercially available AV components
(including YAMAHA AV components). If operation is not
possible with any of the manufacturer codes, program the new
remote control function with the Learn feature (see below) or
use the remote control supplied with the component.
• If you have already programmed a remote control function for a
button, the function by learning programming takes priority
over the setup manufacturer code’s function.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more
than one button at the same time.
Notes
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
AVTV
LEARN
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 67 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
68
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can
use this remote to control your other components. Note
that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected
component. Use the input selector buttons to select the
component you want to operate. The remote control
automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for
that component.
*1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in DTV/CBL or PHONO. When the
manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/CBL
area.
*3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1.
Controlling other components
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
3
2
1
4
5
6
8
7
9
0
A
DVD player/
DVD recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD player CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
1 AV P OWE R
Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1
2 TV POWER
TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2
3 REC/DISC
SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec VCR rec *3 Disc skip Rec (MD)
h Play Play VCR play *3 Play Play Play
ll Search backward Search backward
VCR search
backward *3
Search backward Search backward Search backward
hh Search forward Search forward
VCR search
forward *3
Search forward Search forward Search forward
AUDIO Audio Sound
e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause
b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 Stop Stop Stop
4 TITLE/TV
INPUT
Title TV input *2 TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2
5 TV MUTE
Select TV mute *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2
6 TV VOL +
Up TV volume + *2 TV volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2
TV VOL – Down TV volume – *2 TV volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2
CH +/i Right VCR channel + TV channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 Preset up
CH –/j Left VCR channel – TV channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 Preset down
7 RETURN
Return
8 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)
9 MENU
Menu A/B/C/D/E
0 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display
A ENTER
Title/Index Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 68 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
69
English
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
If you want to program functions not included in the basic
operations covered by the manufacturer code, or an
appropriate manufacturer code is not available, do the
following. You can program any of the buttons available in
the component control area (see page 65). The buttons can
be programmed independently for each component.
This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the
operating instructions for the remote control of your component.)
1 Press an input selector button to select a
source component.
2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
apart from the other remote control on a flat
surface so that their infrared transmitters are
aimed at each other.
3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down
for more than three seconds, the remote enters the
manufacturer code setting mode.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
4 Press the button at which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” is displayed.
5 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window.
Programming codes from other
remote controls
Note
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
Flashes alternately
LEARN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AUDIO
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
STARTMODE
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 69 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
70
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
• “NG” appears in the display window if programming was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.
• This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions.
However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 120 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional
functions.
7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning
mode.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– When the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing at
the appropriate angle.
– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– When the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than
one button at the same time.
You can change the name that appears in the display
window on the remote control if you want to use a
different name to the one that is set as the factory preset.
This is useful when you have set the input selector to
control a different component.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press RE-NAME using a
ballpoint pen or similar
object.
3 Press u / d to select and enter a character.
Pressing d changes the character as follows:
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash).
(Pressing u changes the characters in reverse order.)
4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next
position.
y
If you want to continue setting up names for other
components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1,
3 and 4.
5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the
renaming mode.
Notes
Notes
LEARN
Changing source names in the
display window
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
RE-NAME
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
RE-NAME
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 70 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
71
English
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, renamed source names and setup
manufacturer codes.
1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Other
wise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In
this case, press CLEAR again.
2 Press u / d to select the clear mode.
L:DVD
(L: name of a component)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
component control area. Press an input selector
button to select the component.
L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control
area.
L:ALL Clears all learned functions.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote
to the factory settings.
3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
“C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.
Once you have cleared a learned function for a
button, the button reverts to the factory preset setting.
“ERROR” appears in the display window under the following
circumstances:
– When a button other than the cursor is pressed.
– When more than one button is pressed at the same time.
Clearing function sets
Note
CLEAR
CLEAR
Note
CLEAR
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 71 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
72
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned in a certain
programmed button in each area.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
source component containing the function
you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name appear
alternately in the display window.
y
Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.
Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press LEARN again.
3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the button you
want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window.
When you clear a learned function, the button reverts
to the factory preset setting (or manufacturer setting if
you have set manufacturer codes).
4 Repeat step 3 to clear other learned
functions.
5 Press LEARN again to exit.
Clearing individual functions
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV- AUX
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
LEARN
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 72 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
73
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 Press AMP.
2 Turn on the video monitor and
press ON SCREEN repeatedly
to select the full display
mode.
3 Select the sound field program you want to
adjust.
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field Changing parameter settings
TRANSMIT
RE-NAME
INPUT MODE
STANDBY
SYSTEM
POWER
AB
PHONO
CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X
DVD
AMP
POWERPOWER
REC
AVTV
SELECT
VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CLEAR LEARN
REC
AUDIO
MUTE
MENUTITLE
CH CH
VOL
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS EON
START
SET MENU
LEVEL
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
MODE
PTY SEEK
TV VOL
PRESET
TEST
ON SCREEN
STRAIGHT
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
DISPLAYRETURN
PRESET
TV MUTE
SELECT
TV VOL
AVTV
2
4
5
3
1
AMP
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO
4321
8
10
7
09
65
ENTER
MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN
EX/ES
NIGHTq/DTS
PURE DIRECT
CHP/INDEX
P08
MOVIE THEATER
.General
DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;15ms
P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;20ms
S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
Program No. Program name
Parameters Parameter values
Cursor
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 73 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
74
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
4 Press u / d to select
the parameters.
5 Press j / i to change
the parameter value.
When you set a parameter
to a value other than the
factory-set value, an
asterisk mark (*) appears
by the parameter name on
the front panel display.
6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to
change other program parameters.
You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD”
is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set
“MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 63).
■ Resetting parameters to the factory
presets
To reset a certain parameter
Select the parameter you want to reset, then press j / i
repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter
name disappears.
To reset all parameters
Use PARAM. INI (see page 64).
Note
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
TV VOL
PRESET PRESET
TV MUTE
TV VOL
SELECT
CHCH
+
+
–
–
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 74 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
75
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
■ DSP LEVEL
Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP
effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB – +3 dB
■ INIT. DLY (Initial delay)
Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the
direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther
it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
Control range: 1
– 99 msec
■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the
surround sound field becomes.
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 – 2.0
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Time
Time
Time
INIT. DLY
INIT. DLY
INIT. DLY
Sound Source
Reflection Face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Time
Time
Time
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound Source
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 75 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
76
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ LIVENESS
Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay.
Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The
LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
Control range: 0 – 10
■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of
the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround
channels are used.
Control Range: 1 – 49 msec
■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0 – 10
■ SB INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back
sound field.
Control Range: 1 – 49 msec
■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0 – 10
Source Sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small Reflected
Sound
Large Reflected
Sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 76 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
77
English
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time)
Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to
decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an
extremely wide range.
Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time
for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec
■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning
of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control Range: 0 – 250 msec
■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)
Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
Reverberation
Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source Sound
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Early Reflections
Sound Source Short
Reverberation
Long
Reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source Sound
Reverberation
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
Time
Source Sound
Level
REV. LEVEL
Time
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 77 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
78
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift)
Function: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front
and center channel elements to the presence speakers.
Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3.
For 7ch Stereo
Function: These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
■ CT LEVEL (Center level)
■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level)
■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level)
■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level)
■ PR LEVEL (Presence level)
For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music
■ PANORAMA
Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.
■ DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).
■ CT WIDTH (Center width)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.
For PRO LOGIC IIx Movie, Music and Game
■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx)
Function: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2-
channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources.
Choices: PLII, PLIIx
For DTS Neo:6 Music
■ C. IMAGE (Center image)
Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control range: 0 – 0.5
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 78 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
TROUBLESHOOTING
79
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cord firmly.
—
The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.
24
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
13-15
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
—
On-screen display
does not appear.
The setting for the on-screen display is set
to “DISPLAY OFF”.
Select the full display or short display mode.
52
“GRAY BACK” in SET MENU is set to
OFF, and no video signal is currently
being received.
Set “GRAY BACK” to AUTO to always show the
OSD.
63
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
17-20
The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
26
The input mode is set to DTS or
ANALOG.
Select AUTO.
37
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.
31
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
13
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
31
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
32
The input mode is set to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS
signal.
Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
37
The signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being received from a source component
e.g.: a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
—
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Turn on the video conversion function.
63
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 79 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
80
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
24
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
32
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
13
Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings.
59
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on.
37
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
48
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
59
“CENTER SP” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.
57
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
7ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
48
No sound from the
surround speakers.
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
59
“SURR L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.
57
A monaural source is being played with
STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound
fields.
—
No sound from the
surround back
speakers.
Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SB SELECT.
61
“SURR L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
If the surround left and right speakers are set to
NONE, the surround back speaker setting is
automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate
setting for the surround speakers.
57
“SURR B L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select LRGx1 or SMLx1.
58
No sound from the
subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set
to FRNT when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
58
“LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set
to SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Select BOTH.
58
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 80 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
81
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator on
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operations
instructions for your component.
—
The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
37
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
22
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to this unit through
an MC-head amplifier.
20
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
17-20, 47
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
17-20, 47
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is
set to ON.
Select OFF.
63
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
13
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 81 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
82
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner (RX-V750)
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
There is noise
interference from
digital or high-
frequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
There is noise when
the OSD is displayed.
The OSD may be disturbed when
displaying OSD through component video
connections.
Select OFF in CMPNT OSD.
63
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer
to page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
22
Use the manual tuning method.
40
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
22
Use the manual tuning method.
40
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
40
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
40
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
—
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 82 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
83
English
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
8
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The manufacturer code was not correctly
set.
Set the manufacturer code correctly.
66
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer.
66
Even if the manufacturer code is correctly
set, there are some models that do not
respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
69
The remote control
does not “learn” new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
3
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
69
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
72
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 83 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS
84
If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any
reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets
ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign
and tuner presets.
Be sure this unit is in standby mode.
1 Hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel and press STANDBY/ON.
“FACTORY PRESET” appears in the front panel
display.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure without making any
changes, press STANDBY/ON.
2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the
desired setting.
Reset To reset the unit to its factory presets.
Cancel To cancel without making any changes.
3 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection.
If you selected “Reset”, the unit is reset to its factory
presets and switches to standby mode.
If you selected “Cancel”, the unit switches to standby
mode and nothing is reset.
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R
MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
VIDEO AUX
INPUT
STANDBY/ON
STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
(RX-V750 U.S.A. model)
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 84 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
GLOSSARY
85
English
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has
a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound
processing provide listeners with previously unheard of
excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with
“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology). Music and Game modes are also available for
2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode
for movies and a Game mode for games.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD-video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a
left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus
an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-
channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that
enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding the surround
back channel to existing 5.1-channel format.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two
modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.
GLOSSARY
Audio formats
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 85 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
86
GLOSSARY
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually
measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
Sound field programs Audio information
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 86 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
87
English
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P
B
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ S-Video signal
With the S-Video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-Video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Video signal information
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 87 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
SPECIFICATIONS
88
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 100 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 140 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 135/170/200/245 W
• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 150 W
• IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 110 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ..................................................100 or more
• Frequency Response
CD terminal to Front L/R ....................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ....................0.02%
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ...........0.06%
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
Phono (5 mV) to REC OUT
[U.K., Europe, Australia and Asia models] ..........................81 dB
[Other models] ......................................................................86 dB
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ...............................100 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R .................................................................150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shorted) to Front L/R .................................60 dB/55 dB
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ........................60 dB/45 dB
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut .........................................................±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................3.5 kHz
• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. .................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT .............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT ..................................................................... 2 V/1.2 kΩ
SUB WOOFER ............................................................ 4 V/1.7 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type ........................................................... PAL/NTSC
• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION (RX-V750)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General model] .......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ........................................................ 42 dB
• Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION (RX-V750)
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...............................530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ..................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ..................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ..............................................................300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] .................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[General model] .................AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..................................400 W/500 VA
[Other models] ..................................................................... 440 W
• Standby Power Consumption .................................................. 0.1 W
• AC Outlets
[U.K. and Australia models] ................1 (Total 100 W maximum)
[China, Asia and General models] ......... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[Other models] ..................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
• Dimension (W x H x D) ...................................435 x 171 x 420 mm
• Weight ....................................................................................12.5 kg
SPECIFICATIONS
01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 88 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2004 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WC85520
RX-V750 AV Receiver
DSP-AX750SE AV Amplifier
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
GB
RX-V750/DSP-AX750SE
RXV750_RDS_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 21, 2004 11:44 AM
Documenttranscriptie
RXV750_RDS_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 21, 2004 11:44 AM GB RX-V750/DSP-AX750SE © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WC85520 RX-V750 AV Receiver DSP-AX750SE AV Amplifier OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page i Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: Asia model ...................... 220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model .. 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 1 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................48 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 48 For music sources .................................................... 51 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 8 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................52 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 52 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 52 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 53 Using the test tone ................................................... 54 SET MENU ............................................................55 SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12 Speaker placement ................................................... 12 Speaker connections ................................................ 13 Before connecting components................................ 16 Connecting video components................................. 17 Connecting audio components................................. 20 Connecting the antennas (RX-V750)....................... 22 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 23 Turning on the power............................................... 25 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................65 Control area ............................................................. 65 Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 66 Controlling other components ................................. 68 Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 69 Changing source names in the display window....... 70 Clearing function sets .............................................. 71 Clearing individual functions .................................. 72 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Introduction.............................................................. 26 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26 Starting the setup ..................................................... 27 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 16 Using SET MENU................................................... 56 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 57 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 61 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 63 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 31 Basic operations....................................................... 31 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 33 Selecting input modes.............................................. 37 TUNING (RX-V750) ............................................ 39 What is a sound field ............................................... 73 Changing parameter settings ................................... 73 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................75 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................79 RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........84 GLOSSARY...........................................................85 ADVANCED OPERATION Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 39 Presetting stations .................................................... 40 Selecting preset stations........................................... 42 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43 Receiving RDS stations ........................................... 44 Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 44 PTY SEEK function ................................................ 45 EON function........................................................... 46 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......73 Audio formats .......................................................... 85 Sound field programs............................................... 86 Audio information ................................................... 86 Video signal information ......................................... 87 SPECIFICATIONS...............................................88 RECORDING ....................................................... 47 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 1 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 2 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Front: 100 W + 100 W Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W + 100 W Surround back: 100 W + 100 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ A SET MENU which provides you with items for optimizing this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ S-Video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-Video → Component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes and “learning” capability Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner (RX-V750) ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) • This document is the owner’s manual for both RX-V750 and DSP-AX750SE. Since DSP-AX750SE does not incorporate a tuner, descriptions on tuning are not applicable for DSP-AX750SE. Illustrations for the RX-V750 are mainly used for explanations. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. 2 “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 3 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) RX-V750 LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia and General models) SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Optimizer microphone VOL FREQ/RDS MODE EON PTY SEEK START SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MUTE MENU Indoor FM antenna (Europe, Australia and Korea models) TV VOL TV INPUT CH A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT CH PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN TEST STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT EX/ES 9 0 10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. English 1 3 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 4 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel DSP-AX750SE 1 2 NEXT LEVEL 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE NEXT LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO RDS MODE/FREQ L AUDIO R OPTICAL EON PTY SEEK MODE START A B CD E F G H I J K LM NO (Europe model only) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 26). 3 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 4 5 A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted. [ RX-V750 ] Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. 6 PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+) Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using A/B/C/D/E (NEXT). [ RX-V750 ] Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) (RX-V750) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 5 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS H INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37). 9 VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. I INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. B SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) (RX-V750) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. D STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. J MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). INTRODUCTION 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) (RX-V750) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off). K PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 36). ■ RX-V750 Europe model only L RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display. M PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode. N PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. O EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. E FM/AM (RX-V750) Switches the reception band between FM and AM. F PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust the bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). G TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and right, center, presence and subwoofer channels (see page 32). English 5 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 6 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 65. 1 2 3 TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 5 6 SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC A B C D E 6 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / SELECT Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or SET MENU items. [ RX-V750 ] Press j / i to select preset station numbers when the unit is in tuner mode. G Q I AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL FREQ/RDS MODE 7 8 PTY SEEK 0 START SET MENU TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT ON SCREEN TEST L STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN J K CH PRESET PRESET 9 9 TEST (RETURN) Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the SET MENU parameters. EON LEVEL CH 4 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 5 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. F H 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT EX/ES 9 0 10 ENTER CHP/INDEX M 0 Sound field program / numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs. [ RX-V750 ] Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the unit is in tuner mode. A RE-NAME Use to change the input source name in the display window (see page 70). B CLEAR Use to clear functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, or setting manufacturer codes (see page 71). N O P C LEARN Use to set up manufacturer codes or program functions from other remote controls (see pages 66 and 69). D SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 6 E INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37). 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 7 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS F MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). ■ RX-V750 Europe model only G SELECT k/n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. FREQ/RDS Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display. I VOL –/+ Increases or decreases the volume level. J MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. K SET MENU (A/B/C/D/E) Activates the SET MENU function. [ RX-V750 ] Selects preset station groups when the unit is in tuner mode. EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. INTRODUCTION H AMP Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to control the main unit. Q RDS tuning buttons PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode. PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. L ON SCREEN Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD) this unit sends to your video monitor. M STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. N EX/ES Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel software. O NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 36). P PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 36). English 7 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 8 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT EDIT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO 30 30 L AUDIO R OPTICAL Approximately 6 m RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER VIDEO STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 CD-R DVD SELECT POWER POWER AMP AV TV REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU MUTE TV VOL TV INPUT CH A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 NIGHT +10 ROCK 4 MOVIE 8 EX/ES ENTER CHP/INDEX ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity such as near a bath – high temperature such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperatures – dusty places 8 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 9 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 2 t 96 24 q EX q PL q PL q PL x DVR/VCR2 3 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL 4 5 V-AUX 6 DTV/CBL 78 MD/CD-R DVD NIGHT 90 TUNER CD E PHONO SLEEP HiFi DSP PS TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME OPTIMIZER PTY RT CT EON dB ft mS dB D B PTY HOLD AUTO PCM C A F G H I 2 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 32). 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 5 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 6 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 7 AUTO indicator (RX-V750) Lights up when this unit is in automatic tuning mode. 8 TUNED indicator (RX-V750) Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. L C R LFE SL SB SR J KLM O 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. 96/24 INTRODUCTION 1 N (RX-V750 Europe model only) 9 STEREO indicator (RX-V750) Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 0 MEMORY indicator (RX-V750) Blinks to show that a station can be stored. A MUTE indicator Blinks while the MUTE function is on. B VOLUME level indication Indicates the volume level. C PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. D VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 37). E Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. F SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. G SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. H HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. English 9 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 10 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS I Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. J OPTIMIZER indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. K 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. L LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. M Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. N Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the SPEAKER LEVEL setting (see page 59). O RDS indicators (RX-V750 Europe model only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 11 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 3 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB 6 TUNER Y 75Ω UNBAL. DVD AUDIO 5 INTRODUCTION 1 FM ANT AUDIO GND AM ANT DTV /CBL PHONO VIDEO GND DIGITAL INPUT VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT DVD COAXIAL CD CD DVD IN DTV /CBL (PLAY) PRE OUT AC OUTLETS CENTER SWITCHED MD /CD-R OPTICAL DTV/CBL OUT IN (REC) VCR 1 FRONT DVD MD/CD-R FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER SURROUND PRESENCE /ZONE 2 SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS OUT IN A DVR/ VCR 2 SURROUND BACK SURROUND B OUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT FRONT SUB WOOFER CENTER CENTER SURROUND BACK VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT TUNER MULTI CH INPUT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (RX-V750) 7 8 0 9 A B (DSP-AX750SE) 1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 17, 19 and 20 for details. 8 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 18 for connection information. 2 Audio component jacks See page 20 for connection information. 9 TUNER jacks (DSP-AX750SE) See page 20 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 17 and 19 for connection information. 4 Antenna terminals See page 22 for connection information. 5 PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 14 for connection information. 6 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 23). 0 PRE OUT jacks See page 21 for connection information. A Speaker terminals See page 14 for connection information. B IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch See page 24. < Asia and General models only > FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 22. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 23. 7 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack See page 20 for details. English 11 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 12 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) PL PR C FR FL 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR more than 30 cm The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. Subwoofer The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) 1.8 m 1.8 m Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 12 Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m above the floor. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 13 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 4 5 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Connecting to PRESENCE speaker terminals 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the end of each speaker cable. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Unscrew the knob. 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. 1 2 3 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 10 mm 1 PREPARATION CAUTION • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 24). • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. 3 English 13 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 14 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SPEAKER SETUP Subwoofer system Presence speakers Right Left 1 2 3 Surround speakers Right Left 4 5 PRE OUT CENTER FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER PRESENCE /ZONE 2 SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS A SURROUND B FRONT CENTER SURROUND BACK (RX-V750) 6 7 Front speakers (B) 8 10 9 Center speaker Right Left Surround back speakers Right Left Front speakers (A) You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 14 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 15 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the FRONT A or B terminals. ■ CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker to these terminals. 2 ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. 3 6 8 ■ SUB WOOFER jack ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals 7 1 5 PREPARATION Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. 4 10 9 Speaker layout Connect presence speakers to these terminals. English 15 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 16 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. ■ Cable indications ■ Video jacks For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-Video cables S This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO jacks. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 63), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jack For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Only when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 63). Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. 16 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 17 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Optical out Coaxial out Video out DVD player PREPARATION Audio out O C R L COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y DVD AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT DVD S VIDEO MONITOR OUT Video in DVD Video monitor COAXIAL DVD MONITOR OUT VIDEO S VIDEO (RX-V750) English 17 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 18 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND, left and right SURROUND BACK and SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input (RX-V750) (RX-V750) FRONT FRONT SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT R L Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Front out Multi-format player/ External decoder CENTER MULTI CH INPUT Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Surround out Front out Multi-format player/ Surround External decoder back out Surround out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output. 18 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 19 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Video out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out O R L (RX-V750) PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO AUDIO DTV /CBL VIDEO VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT S VIDEO DVD DTV /CBL OPTICAL DTV/CBL IN VCR 1 OUT R L R L Audio in Audio out Video in DVD recorder or VCR Video out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit. VIDEO AUX S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L S-Video out 19 English Video out Game console or video camera 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 20 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components Turntable GND Audio out R AUDIO L AUDIO PHONO Audio out CD player GND DIGITAL INPUT CD L R Audio out COAXIAL IN CD (PLAY) L MD /CD-R OPTICAL C R OUT (REC) L Coaxial out MD recorder or tape deck R Audio in Optical out MD/CD-R O Optical in O MD/CD-R OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT L Tuner R TUNER Audio out (DSP-AX750SE) ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 20 ■ Connecting a tuner (DSP-AX750SE) Connect the output jacks on your tuner to the TUNER jacks. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 21 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes 1 23 PREPARATION • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, do not make connections to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signals output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see page 64), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. 4 PRE OUT CENTER L R FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK 5 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SURROUND BACK PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. 5 SUB WOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding speaker terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker levels” on page 53). • Some signals may not be output from the SUB WOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 57) and LFE/BASS OUT (see page 58) settings. English 21 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 22 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas (RX-V750) Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Indoor FM antenna (included) AM loop antenna (included) • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. ■ FREQUENCY STEP switch (Asia and General models only) TUNER 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT Notes GND AM ANT Because the interstation frequency FREQUENCY STEP spacing differs in different areas, set AM FM the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. • North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz • Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s power cord from the AC wall outlet. 10 KHZ / 100 KHZ 9 KHZ / 50 KHZ Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. 22 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 23 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord ■ Memory back-up Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models .............................. 1 OUTLET Korea model .............................................................. None Other models ................................................. 2 OUTLETS PREPARATION Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s) supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: China, Asia and General models .............................. 50 W Korea model ................................................................ N/A Other models ........................................................... 100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: Asia model ......................... 220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ...... 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models) English 23 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 24 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch CAUTION Do not change the setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on, as doing so may damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed on either the front panel or remote control, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the way to either position when this unit is in standby mode. Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Switch position Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Left Center, Surround, Surround back, Presence The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. Right Center, Surround, Surround back, Presence 24 The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 25 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM CONNECTIONS Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PREPARATION (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) 1 TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM 1 POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC 1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM STANDBY /ON Front panel 2 or POWER Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. English 25 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 26 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) Notes OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL PROGRAM • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 30. MEMORY TU MAN'L/AUTO FM A INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE Y EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. WIRING/LEVEL: Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker so that the sound level of each speaker is the same when heard from the listening position. DISTANCE/PHASE: Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the delay of each channel so that the sound from each speaker reaches the listening position at the same time. Also checks the phase of each speaker. SIZE: Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the crossover/high cut frequency for the subwoofer to improve the sound relationship between the speakers and the subwoofer. 26 Notes • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 27 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 6 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press u / d to select SETUP, then press j / i to select the desired setting. 1 AUTO:MENU y p If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME RELOAD MIN MAX MAX MIN Subwoofer UNDO 1 Switch on this unit and your video monitor. Make sure the OSD is displayed. 2 Press AMP. DEFAULT y You can choose RELOAD or UNDO only if you have already performed auto setup. AMP 7 3 Press SET MENU. SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 4 To perform the auto setup procedure (YPAO). To reload the last auto setup (YPAO) settings to override any manual changes. To undo the last auto setup (YPAO) and restore the previous settings. To restore the factory preset (default) setup parameters. PREPARATION AUTO p . SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START Automatic processing of all items [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Press d to select START, then press SELECT to start the setup procedure. • If you selected AUTO in step 6, loud test tones will be output from each speaker in turn; WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure. • If you selected DEFAULT, RELOAD or UNDO in step 6, no test tones are output. Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP. 1 AUTO:MENU + SET MENU TV VOL CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP CH + PRESET p p – p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter TV VOL SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO .START Automatic processing of all items []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Start The RESULT:WIRING screen appears after all items have been measured and set. 5 Press SELECT to enter AUTO SETUP. RESULT:WIRING FRONTL;;;;;;;OK + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return – 27 English • If an ERROR screen appears, see “If an error screen appears” on page 28. • If a WARNING screen appears, see “If a warning screen appears” on page 29. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 28 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM AUTO SETUP ■ If an error screen appears 8 Use the cursor buttons to display the results. • Press u / d to display information about individual results. • Press j / i to switch between each result list. 1 Press SELECT to display detailed information about the error. ERROR RESULT:WIRING .E-5:NOISY FRONTL;;;;;;;OK 2 9 When finished, press SELECT. The RESULT:EXIT screen appears. 10 Press u / d to select SET or CANCEL. p p )RETRYEXIT []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return Press j / i to switch between error messages. For details about each message, see page 30. ERROR: E-5 < NOISY > RESULT:EXIT Keep SILENT SET CANCEL 11 [SELECT]:Return p p NOWARNING RESULTLIST .)SETCANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter To apply the auto setup (YPAO) settings. To cancel the auto setup (YPAO) without making any changes. 3 When finished, press SELECT to return to the main error screen. 4 Press u / d to select RETRY or EXIT, then press SELECT. Press SELECT to set or cancel the auto setup settings. ERROR E-5:NOISY y If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page 55). 28 RETRY EXIT p • If E-10 appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. • To cancel the auto setup procedure before completion, press SET MENU. p Notes .)RETRY EXIT [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter To retry the auto setup procedure. To exit auto setup. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 29 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM AUTO SETUP ■ If a warning screen appears 1 Press j / i to display detailed information about each warning. For details about each message, see page 30. WARNING:W-1 PREPARATION <OUTOFPHASE> ReverseChannel FLFR ----------[<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return y Warnings let you know about potential problems detected during auto setup. Warnings will not cancel the auto setup. 2 When you are finished, press SELECT. The RESULT:EXIT screen appears. 3 Press u / d to select RESULT LIST, then press SELECT. RESULT:EXIT WARNINGLIST .RESULTLIST p p )SETCANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter The RESULT:WIRING screen appears. RESULT:WIRING FRONTL;;;;;REV. [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return Continue from step 8 on page 28 to display each result. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate your system. • If SWFR PHASE:REV appears in RESULT:WIRING, the SET MENU “SUBWOOFER PHASE” parameter is automatically set to REVERSE (see page 59). • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. English 29 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 30 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. Errors during auto setup Press SELECT to display detailed information about individual errors. Press j / i to switch between error messages. Error message Cause Remedy E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B. • Check the front left and right speaker connections. E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E-3:NO PRES. SP A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. • Try the auto setup procedure in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners (etc.) or move them away from the optimizer microphone. E-6:CHECK SURR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Do not touch the optimizer microphone during the auto setup procedure. E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E-9:USER CANCEL The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to user activity. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not adjust VOLUME (etc.) during the auto setup procedure. E-10:OTHER ERROR A DSP communication error or hangup occurred. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Warnings after auto setup Press j / i to display detailed information about individual warnings. Warning message • • • • Cause Remedy W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m. • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. • Check the speaker connections. • Use speakers of similar quality and efficiency. • Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again. If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made. If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 30 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 31 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 4 (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. INPUT A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VOLUME or OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO 1 3 7 VIDEO CLEAR SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD MODE 4 EON PTY SEEK TITLE DVR/VCR2 VCR1 MUTE V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R TUNER PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS CD PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 10 D VD D AUTOO00 dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT Selected input source CH Input mode PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN TEST STRAIGHT TV VOL SELECT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT POWER POWER TV AV STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK AMP REC 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT 9 0 10 7 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operating instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. EX/ES ENTER CHP/INDEX 1 q PL TV VOL TV INPUT CH 7 96 24 q EX q PL q PL x PCM START SET MENU LEVEL t SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL VOL FREQ/RDS BASIC OPERATION STANDBY Remote control The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. 6 DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER Front panel OPTICAL AV LEARN AUDIO 1 R 6 TV RE-NAME AUDIO 4 REC TRANSMIT L Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. VOLUME SYSTEM STANDBY /ON + POWER or or Front panel – Remote control 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel. Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. VOL Front panel Remote control SPEAKERS B A English 31 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 32 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 48 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM AMP or Front panel STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT 9 0 10 ROCK EX/ES ENTER CHP/INDEX Remote control To adjust the tone You can adjust the tonal quality TONE CONTROL of your front left and right, center, presence and subwoofer speakers or headphones (when connected). Press TONE CONTROL on the PROGRAM front panel repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease. • Select TREBLE to adjust the high frequency response. • Select BASS to adjust the low frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. y Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. Note To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or the 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. 32 TONE CONTROL is not effective during playback in the PURE DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected (page 36). To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. The MUTE indicator blinks in the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. y You can adjust the muting level (see page 60). MUTE 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 33 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM PLAYBACK ■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation MULTI CH IN or VOLUME Front panel Remote control OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL EDIT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) PROGRAM Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel display. Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source, then select an audio source. PHONO BASIC OPERATION ■ Playing video sources in the background t 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL SLEEP MD/CD-R DVD NIGHT ZONE2 PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 10 DJAZZACLUBO00 dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR Program name MULTI CH IN A B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Audio sources Video sources Note If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source, then press MULTI CH INPUT. English 33 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 34 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation ■ Enjoying multi-channel software SET MENU LEVEL TITLE If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES decoders. MUTE MENU TV VOL TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR TV INPUT LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD A/B/C/D/E CH CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT 9 0 POWER POWER TV AV Sound field program buttons EX/ES ENTER 10 CHP/INDEX SELECT AMP ROCK 1 MUSIC Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press EX/ES on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback. AMP EX/ES REC ENTER AUDIO CHP/INDEX Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display. To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly when PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed. + TV VOL STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK CH 1 2 3 4 – MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE PRESET 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT EX/ES 9 0 AMP TV MUTE SELECT CH + PRESET TV VOL – ENTER 10 CHP/INDEX t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL SLEEP MD/CD-R DVD NIGHT ZONE2 PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 10 DJAZZACLUBO00 dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/ 24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field programs will be applied. AUTO (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. Decoders (select with j / i) You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder. OFF (OFF) Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels. y When “SURR B L/R SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 58), the surround back channel will be output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 34 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 35 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM PLAYBACK Notes Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the decoder. /DTS 9 You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC IIx Movie* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software. BASIC OPERATION • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder (PLIIx Movie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in the following cases: – When “SURR L/R SP” (see page 57) or “SURR B L/R SP” (see page 58) is set to NONE. – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When “2ch Stereo” or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 58). • PLIIxMovie cannot be selected when “SURR B L/R SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 58). ■ Enjoying 2-channel software PRO LOGIC IIx Music* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software. PRO LOGIC IIx Game* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software. DTS Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. DTS Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. * Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 78). Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 58). English 35 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 36 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (PURE DIRECT) PURE DIRECT allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and DSP processors, and turn off the video circuitry and front panel display to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct. The indicator around the front panel button lights up. PURE DIRECT or Front panel ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. PURE DIRECT NIGHT 0 +10 Remote control Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting SET MENU parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press j / i to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select MIN for minimum compression. • Select MID for standard compression. • Select MAX for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 36 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 37 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. PROGRAM STEREO or HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT EX/ES 9 0 Selecting input modes This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. 1 Rotate INPUT to select the input source. INPUT ENTER 10 CHP/INDEX Remote control Front panel 2 2ch Stereo Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. y INPUT MODE You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”. In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 10 D VD D AUTOO00 dB ft mS dB 96/24 BASIC OPERATION ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals L C R LFE SL SB SR Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT. Input source STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or AUTO EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control DTS STRAIGHT ANALOG Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Input mode y You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 62). Note English Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SURR L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 57) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 37 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 38 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM PLAYBACK Notes 3 • When you play DTS-encoded CD/LDs with the input mode set to AUTO: – This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode. The unit remains in DTS mode (and the t indicator may flash) for up to 30 seconds after playback of the DTS source is complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT MODE to reselect AUTO. – The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Displaying information about the input source Press u / d to display the following information about the input signal. + TV VOL CH – 2 A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD (Format) in rate Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) so that “STRAIGHT” appears in the display. STRAIGHT AMP then EFFECT STRAIGHT 38 + – fs Select the input source. CH PRESET TV VOL You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. 1 TV MUTE SELECT PRESET flg Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”. Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 39 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TUNING (RX-V750) TUNING (RX-V750) Automatic and manual tuning 3 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. TUNING MODE ■ Automatic tuning If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) OPTIMIZER MIC Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EDIT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO 4 1 L AUDIO R OPTICAL 3 R/VCR2 VCR1 T CINEMA SP TUAL V-AUX DTV/CBL MD/CD-R DVD NIGHT ZONE2 AB PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP SLEEP PS BASIC OPERATION 3 2 VIDEO TUNER TUNED STEREO MEM PTY RT CT EON 1A -AAM11440kkHz 1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. R/VCR2 FM/AM FM or AM VCR1 T CINEMA SP TUAL AB V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER TUNED STEREO MEM PTY RT CT EON 1A -AAM11530kkHz When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. English 39 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 40 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TUNING (RX-V750) ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT MULTI CH INPUT STANDBY /ON Disappears AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. 1 1 PRESET/TUNING EDIT R/VCR2 VCR1 T CINEMA SP TUAL AB V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS EON Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to l PRESET/TUNING h continue searching. LEVEL R OPTICAL 2 FM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. PRESET/TUNING EDIT R/VCR2 VCR1 T CINEMA SP TUAL AB V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER TUNED STEREO MEM PTY RT CT EON 1A -AAM11440kkHz 40 AUDIO TUNER TUNED STEREO MEM PTY RT CT 1A -AAM11440kkHz 3 L Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP 3 VIDEO 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 41 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TUNING (RX-V750) ■ Manually presetting stations 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL EDIT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES MEMORY STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL MAN'L/AUTO FM 3 t 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD 4 2,5 PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1A 1:FM187.5kMHz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR 1 t 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1A 1:AM18630kkHz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 BASIC OPERATION When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Tune into a station. See page 39 for tuning instructions. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward the lower frequencies. Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1C 1:AM18630kkHz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR Preset group English Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. 3 41 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 42 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TUNING (RX-V750) 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 through 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) l PRESET/TUNING h VOLUME LEVEL OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT MULTI CH INPUT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO t 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON dB 1C 3:AM18630kkHz ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR 1 2 Preset number MODE PTY SEEK START SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT 5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MAN'L/AUTO FM t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD CH 1C 3:AM18630kkHz 96/24 ON SCREEN TEST STRAIGHT TV VOL DISPLAY 1 2 EFFECT When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 dB ft mS dB PRESET RETURN PHONO EON CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT A/B/C/D/E L C R LFE SL SB SR Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E SET MENU Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. or MENU NEXT 6 Front panel Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E 2 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. + TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING h or CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – + LEVEL PRESET PRESET Front panel TV VOL – Remote control DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA SP VIRTUAL AB x 42 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY M PTY RT CT EON 1E 1:FM187.5kMHz ft mS dB 9 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 43 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TUNING (RX-V750) Exchanging preset stations 4 You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) VOLUME DVR/VCR2 OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE NEXT LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO VCR1 SILENT CINEMA SP VIRTUAL AB EDIT PROGRAM INPUT x PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY M PTY RT CT EON 1E EDIT18E1-A5Hz ft mS dB 9 EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO 2,4 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 1,3 1,3 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 1 PRESET/TUNING EDIT DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA SP VIRTUAL x 3 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 AB SLEEP MD/CD-R TUNER PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY M PTY RT CT EON 1E 1:FM187.5kMHz ft mS dB 9 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA SP VIRTUAL AB x V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY M PTY RT CT EON 1A 5:FM190.6kMHz ft mS dB 9 English 43 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 44 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TUNING (RX-V750) Receiving RDS stations RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various RDS data such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks) when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. Changing the RDS mode Four modes are available for displaying RDS data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT indicators that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up in the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ (or FREQ/ RDS on the remote control) repeatedly to display the various RDS data offered by the transmitting station as shown below. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: RDS MODE/FREQ PS The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. Front panel ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: or There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pops ROCK M Rock M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): See “EON function” on the following page. 44 FREQ/RDS PTY RT Remote control CT Frequency display y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. Notes • Do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until an RDS indicator lights up in the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if you press the button prior to this. This is because this unit has not finished receiving all of the RDS data from the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • This unit cannot utilize the RDS data source if the signal received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data may not be received under poor reception conditions. In such cases, press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Although this will change the reception mode to manual, RDS data may be displayed when you change the display to RDS mode. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear in the front panel display. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 45 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TUNING (RX-V750) PTY SEEK function 2 If you select the desired program type, this unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears in the front panel display. (RX-V750 Europe model) l PRESET/TUNING h RDS MODE/FREQ EON LEVEL VOLUME PTY SEEK MODE START Front panel OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT POP M or INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R + OPTICAL TV VOL 2 1 3 CH – POWER POWER TV AV AMP CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – REC Remote control AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL FREQ/RDS MODE EON PTY SEEK START SET MENU LEVEL TITLE 3 MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT CH PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN TEST STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT 2 y Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while searching for stations. When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 PTY SEEK MODE START Front panel Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. or PTY SEEK PTY SEEK START Remote control Front panel MODE PTY HOLD Lights up or MODE PTY SEEK MODE START BASIC OPERATION 1,3 START Remote control Flashes • The unit stops searching when it finds a station broadcasting the selected type of program. • If the found station is not the one you desire, press PTY SEEK START again. This unit resumes searching for another station broadcasting the same type of program. ■ To cancel this function Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. English 45 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 46 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TUNING (RX-V750) EON function This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast the selected type of program and switches from the station currently being received to the new station when the broadcast starts. Note This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the EON indicator lights up in the front panel display. 1 Check that the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit up, tune into another RDS station so that the EON indicator lights up. 2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name appears in the front panel display. RDS MODE/FREQ EON Front panel or EON Remote control • If a preset RDS station type starts broadcasting the selected type of program, the unit automatically switches from the program being received to that program. (EON indicator flashes.) • When broadcasting of the selected program ends, the unit returns to the previous station (or another program on the same station). ■ To cancel this function Press EON repeatedly until no program type name is shown in the front panel display. 46 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 47 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 2 TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 SELECT 1 2 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. BASIC OPERATION 1 POWER Notes • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 59) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-Video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-Video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-Video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. English 47 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 48 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 37) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel (left and right) or plays back 2-channel sources as is. MUSIC VIDEO This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT: Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. TV THEATER: Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presernce sound field. TV THEATER: Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. 48 Sources MULTI 2-CH 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 49 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features Standard 5.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital sources. DTS: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1-channel processing for DTS sources. DTS 96/24: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1-channel processing for 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Disc6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS ES Disc6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. STANDARD Sources English 49 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 50 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features PRO LOGIC: SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.* PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.* DTS: Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. * You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro 50 Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 78. Sources 2-CH 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 51 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program Features CONCERT HALL HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. JAZZ CLUB HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. ROCK CONCERT HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by highenergy, “immediate” sound. q D+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. q D+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2-channel (left and right) playback. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.* DTS: Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. Sources MULTI 2-CH MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS * You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro 2-CH Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 78. English 51 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 52 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS Selecting the OSD mode Using the sleep timer You can display this unit’s operating information on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short DISPLAY display, and display off. Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 ON SCREEN SELECT Full display Always shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. POWER POWER TV AV AMP Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. Display off Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU or the test tone feature, even if the OSD mode is set to “Display off”. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. P08 MOVIE THEATER .General DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;15ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 SLEEP 120min SLEEP OFF SLEEP SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min SLEEP 60min P08MOVIETHEATER General t Full display Short display 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1E SLEEP8120minz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR Notes • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “DISPLAY SET” (see page 63). The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. SLEEP indicator t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM 52 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD PHONO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1E CONCERT2HALLz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 53 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. SLEEP SLEEP OFF y Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26), “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 59) and “Using the test tone” (page 54). The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL FREQ/RDS MODE 2 EON PTY SEEK START SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MUTE MENU 4 TV VOL TV INPUT CH A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT CH PRESET PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT 3 1 Press AMP. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR.R SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SUR.L SWFR PRES Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround back right speaker level Surround back left speaker level Surround left speaker level Subwoofer level Presence speaker level y 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. 4 Press SELECT when you have completed your adjustment. ADVANCED OPERATION Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. y This operation can also be performed using the controls on the front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level. English 53 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 54 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Outputting the test tone from the PRESENCE speakers Using the test tone You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26), “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 59) and “Manually adjusting speaker levels” (page 53). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard from your listening position. 6 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker from which you want to output the test tone. TEST TEST TEST TEST FRONT PRESENCE PRES L PRES R Front speakers Presence speakers Left presence speakers Right presence speakers Note You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL FREQ/RDS MODE EON START PTY SEEK SET MENU LEVEL TITLE 4,7 CH A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 2,5,8 MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT PRESET ON SCREEN TEST STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY 3,6 EFFECT 1 Press AMP. 2 Press TEST. The unit outputs a test tone. 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST LEFT CENTER RIGHT SUR.R SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SUR.L SUBWOOFER Front left speaker Center speaker Front right speaker Right surround speaker Right surround back speaker Left surround back speaker Left surround speaker Subwoofer 4 Press j / i to adjust the speaker volumes. 5 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. If PRESENCE SP in “SPEAKER SET” is set to YES, you can adjust the presence speaker volumes (proceed to step 6). 54 7 Press j / i to adjust the presence speaker volumes. 8 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 55 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ AUTO SETUP Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26). ■ MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. y Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). You can use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. Item Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 57 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 59 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 59 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 60 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 60 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 60 G)AUDIO SET Customizes the muting level, audio delay and height of the front and center channel sounds. 60 H)PR/SB SELECT Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are connected to this unit. 61 Item Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 61 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 62 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. 62 ADVANCED OPERATION 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. 3 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. Item Features Page Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 63 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 63 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 64 D)ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 64 English A)DISPLAY SET 55 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 56 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU Using SET MENU 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. Press SELECT to enter MANUAL SETUP. 1 SOUND MENU appears on the front panel display. ;MANUAL SETUP + TV VOL POWER POWER TV 1 AMP AV CH – REC AUDIO TV MUTE SELECT + []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter PRESET VOL FREQ/RDS MODE TV VOL EON PTY SEEK TITLE – START SET MENU LEVEL MUTE 2,8 MENU TV VOL TV INPUT 3-7 CH A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT CH PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN TEST STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN p PRESET CH p DISC SKIP .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3OPTIONMENU DISPLAY 5 Press u / d to select the desired menu. 6 Press SELECT to enter the selected menu. EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT EX/ES 9 0 10 ENTER CHP/INDEX 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 + TV VOL y CH – TV MUTE SELECT CH + PRESET p PRESET p You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTERGEQ []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter TV VOL – Note You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode. 1 7 Press AMP. AMP Press u / d to select the item you want to adjust, then press j / i to change the setting of the item. B)SPEAKER LEVEL 2 -+ .FR C SL Press SET MENU. SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 3 Press u / d to select MANUAL SETUP. + SET MENU TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + ;AUTOSETUP .;MANUALSETUP PRESET 8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. SET MENU []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter p – p TV VOL Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting. To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN. MENU A/B/C/D/E Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. 56 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 57 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE FRONT SP SMALL)LARGE 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTERGEQ []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter ■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG CENTER SP NONE)SMLLRG Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SURR L/R SP NONE)SMLLRG • Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 37) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP) to NONE. • Select SML if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LRG if you have large surround left and right speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION • Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. • Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. English 57 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 58 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU Surround back speakers SURR B L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 SURR B L/R SP Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers according to the characteristics of your system. This setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH SMLx1)SMLx2 • Select NONE if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. • Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. Note If you select SMLx1 or LRGx1, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Choices: NONE, YES LFE/BASS OUT SWFRFRNT)BOTH • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. • Select FRNT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front speakers according to the speaker settings (even if you have previously set front speakers to SML). • Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want to output low-frequency signals from front channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and lowfrequency signals from other channels are also directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs. Cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz PRESENCE SP CROSS OVER )NONEYES FREQ;;;80Hz • Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers. • Select YES if you have presence speakers. 58 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 59 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer. Choices: NORMAL (normal), REVERSE (reverse) 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. C)SP DISTANCE )NORMALREVERSE ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 57). Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB B)SPEAKER LEVEL -+ .FR C SL * SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 58). Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft) Other models: meters (m) • Select meters to input speaker distances in meters. • Select feet to input speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • SB L* adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m • SB R* adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m • PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m • PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m * ADVANCED OPERATION • FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right speakers. • C adjusts the balance of the front left and center speakers. • SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround left speakers. • SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back left speakers. • SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back right speakers. • SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround right speakers. • SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and subwoofer. • PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence speakers. p • Select NORMAL if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust SURR B will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 58). y To calibrate, use the test tone feature (see page 54). English 59 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 60 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. You can adjust 5 frequency bands: 100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz Choices: –6 to +6 dB Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) D)CENTER GEQ p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p p .TEST)OFFON -+ 100Hz0dB 300Hz0dB 1kHz0dB 3kHz0dB 10kHz0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust F)DYNAMIC RANGE .SP:MINSTD)MAX HP:MINSTD)MAX • Select ON to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the currently selected source component. • Press u / d to select a frequency band. • Press j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. Headphone HP Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. ■ Audio set G)AUDIO SET Use to customize this units overall audio settings. G)AUDIO SET .AUDIOMUTE;;MUTE AUDIODELAY;;0ms DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Selet p ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB Speaker SP Select to adjust the speaker compression. E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE LEVEL”, some signals may not be output from the SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack. 60 Audio mute AUDIO MUTE Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 ms 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 61 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT Use to turn on and off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see page 78). This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. Choices: OFF, ON • Select OFF to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect. • Select ON to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect. 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. 2 INPUTMENU .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME p p []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter Note “DIALG.LIFT” appears only when “PRESENCE SP” is set to YES (see page 58). ■ Presence/surround back channel select ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O H)PR/SB SELECT You can select to prioritize either the surround back or presence speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRch, SBch ASSIGNMENT You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. H)PR/SBSELECT PRch)SBch For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A and B Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVR/VCR2 p p []/[]:Select [SELECT]:Return CMPNT-VINPUT • Select PRch to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 Choices: MD/CD-R, TUNER (DSP-AX750SE), CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVD, PHONO, DVR/VCR2 ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICALOUT .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 Choices: CD, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVD, PHONO, DVR/VCR2, MD/CD-R, TUNER (DSP-AX750SE) OPTICALIN English .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) 61 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 62 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 Choices: TUNER (DSP-AX750SE), CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, MD/CD-R, DVD, PHONO, DVR/VCR2 ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the OSD and front panel display. C)INPUTRENAME COAXIALIN .(5);;;;; CD ( CD ) (6);;;;; DVD (DVD ) [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press u / d to select the character you want, then use j / i to move to the next space. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, etc. 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each input. 6 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 37 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST B)INPUTMODE )AUTOLAST [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return • Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button will not be recalled. 62 p DVD->DVD p 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 63 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU 3 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. 3 OPTIONMENU1/2 p p .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) • Press + to lower the position of the OSD. • Press – to raise the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Note ■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET A)DISPLAYSET p p .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VCONV;;;;;;;;ON OSDSHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAYBACK;;;AUTO CMPNTOSD;;;;;ON []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:sELECT Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 Component OSD CMPNT OSD Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when using the SET MENU, test tone or parameter functions. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Note Set menu functions even when OFF is selected. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORYGUARD )OFFON ADVANCED OPERATION Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-Video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals from the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-Video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-Video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF not to convert any signals. • Select ON to convert composite signals to S-Video and component signals, and to convert S-Video signals to component signals. If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be displayed on the screen when video signals are not being input. [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return Notes • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (i.e., S-Video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-Video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Select ON to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone or select any other SET MENU items. English 63 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 64 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI ■ Zone set D)ZONE SET Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the parameter values have been changed from their initial settings. Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. C)PARAM.INI 1234 567*8 9 Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. D)ZONESET SPB;;;;;;FRONT [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return Speaker B set SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. 64 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 65 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after pressing AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected component. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT Press AMP to control this unit. POWER POWER TV AV The buttons in the dotted lines control this unit in any mode. (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, INPUT MODE, MULTI CH IN, VOLUME +/– and MUTE) AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E CH CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET PRESET TEST ON SCREEN A/B buttons and the input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...CD recorder SELECT k/n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. RE-NAME STANDBY B PHONO MULTI CH IN TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER TV REC AV AUDIO ROCK 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT 9 0 10 DISC SKIP VOLAUDIO MODE EX/ES LEVEL ENTER Component control area You can control up to 11 different components by setting appropriate manufacturer codes (see page 66). Fixing the remote to AMP mode You can fix the remote permanently to AMP mode (fixed AMP mode) so that the shaded areas above always control this unit. This is useful, if you primarily want to use the remote control in AMP mode. To fix AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds so that “A:___” appears in the display window. EON FREQ/RDS START PTY SEEK SET MENU TITLE TV INPUT EON MUTE MENU TV VOLMODE LEVEL START PTY SEEK A/B/C/D/E SET MENU TITLE CH PRESET TEST TV MUTE TV INPUT SELECT MENU CHTV VOL A/B/C/D/E PRESET CH TV MUTESTRAIGHT ON SCREEN SELECT DISPLAY PRESET EFFECT TEST ON SCREEN HALL JAZZTV VOL ROCK RETURN DISPLAY CH TV VOL RETURN PRESET STEREO 1 MUSIC A:DVD DISC SKIP FREQ/RDS CHP/INDEX Fixed AMP mode REC ADVANCED OPERATION JAZZ 2 POWER TV EFFECT HALL AMP AV POWER DISPLAY 1 LEARN INPUT MODE A POWER STEREO CLEAR SLEEP V-AUX STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER 5 q/DTS 9 2 3 4 STEREO HALL MOVIE JAZZ ENTERTAIN TV THTR 6 1 7 2 3 8 MUSIC NIGHT ENTERTAIN TV THTR PURE DIRECT EX/ES 0 5 10 6 ENTER 7 ROCK 4 MOVIE 8 CHP/INDEX q/DTS PURE DIRECT 9 0 NIGHT 10 EX/ES ENTER CHP/INDEX DVD Component control mode English To temporarily switch to component control mode, press AMP. To cancel fixed AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds. 65 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 66 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting manufacturer codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. The following table shows the factory preset component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. Input area Component category (Library) A LD LEARN Manufacturer Yamaha (U.K. and Europe models) Yamaha-1 (Other models) B CD-R PHONO TV – V-AUX VCR – Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. Yamaha y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. Yamaha-3 (U.K. and Europe models) Yamaha-1 (Other models) TUNER TUNER MD/CD-R MD Yamaha-1 CD CD Yamaha-1 DTV/CBL TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 DVR Yamaha DVD DVD Yamaha-1 If you want to change a library (component category), press j / i. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR * The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “YPC” to operate this unit. However, you can switch between the following two codes if necessary. • The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “YPC”. Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s). 1 YPC To operate this unit. ZONE (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) To operate ZONE 2 features. Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. PHONO MULTI CH IN A B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 3 Press u / d to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TV VOL – 66 CH + PRESET 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 67 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the manufacturer code is correct. POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL FREQ/RDS MODE EON PTY SEEK START SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E y • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you continuously want to set up a code for another component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN Notes ADVANCED OPERATION • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible manufacturer codes for commercially available AV components (including YAMAHA AV components). If operation is not possible with any of the manufacturer codes, program the new remote control function with the Learn feature (see below) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button at the same time. English 67 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 68 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 POWER POWER TV AV 3 REC AMP AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL FREQ/RDS EON MODE 4 5 6 PTY SEEK TITLE 8 MUTE TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT CH PRESET ON SCREEN TEST STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR 6 7 8 PURE DIRECT NIGHT EX/ES 9 0 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A *1 0 MOVIE 5 q/DTS ENTER CHP/INDEX 1 2 3 9 MENU TV VOL PRESET 7 START SET MENU LEVEL A DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Digital TV/ Cable TV LD player CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 REC/DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 Disc skip Rec (MD) h Play Play VCR play *3 Play Play Play ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward AUDIO Audio e Pause b Skip backward a Skip forward s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 TITLE/TV INPUT Title TV input *2 TV MUTE Select TV VOL + Up TV VOL – Down Sound Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Stop Stop Stop TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV mute *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 CH +/i Right VCR channel + TV channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 Preset up CH –/j Left VCR channel – TV channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 Preset down RETURN Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) MENU Menu DISPLAY Display ENTER Title/Index A/B/C/D/E Enter Display Display Display Display Enter Chapter/Time Index Index This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in DTV/CBL or PHONO. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1. *2 68 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 69 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming codes from other remote controls 3 If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or an appropriate manufacturer code is not available, do the following. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 65). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than three seconds, the remote enters the manufacturer code setting mode. LEARN Note This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the remote control of your component.) 1 PHONO y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 4 MULTI CH IN A B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press the button at which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. MULTI CH IN INPUT MODE LEARN SLEEP CD CLEAR PHONO DVD RE-NAME STANDBY MD/CD-R TRANSMIT POWER B DVR/VCR2 SYSTEM A VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER VOL Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. DTV/CBL POWER AUDIO TV EON REC START DISC SKIP MODE FREQ/RDS 2 Press an input selector button to select a source component. Flashes alternately Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. LEARN INPUT MODE CLEAR SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN RE-NAME STANDBY PHONO TRANSMIT POWER B MD/CD-R SYSTEM A DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER DTV/CBL TV POWER ADVANCED OPERATION LEARN INPUT MODE CLEAR SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN RE-NAME STANDBY PHONO TRANSMIT POWER B MD/CD-R SYSTEM A DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER DTV/CBL TV POWER 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 5 English 69 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 70 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Notes • “NG” appears in the display window if programming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 120 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. Changing source names in the display window You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name to the one that is set as the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD LEARN Notes • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button at the same time. 2 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Press u / d to select and enter a character. Pressing d changes the character as follows: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash). (Pressing u changes the characters in reverse order.) + TV VOL CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – 4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next position. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – y If you want to continue setting up names for other components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME 70 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 71 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, renamed source names and setup manufacturer codes. 4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory preset setting. CLEAR 1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – When a button other than the cursor is pressed. – When more than one button is pressed at the same time. CLEAR y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Other wise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. 2 Press u / d to select the clear mode. L:DVD (L: name of a component) L:AMP L:ALL RNAME FCTRY 3 Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all renamed source names. Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR ADVANCED OPERATION Note “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. English 71 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 72 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing individual functions 4 Repeat step 3 to clear other learned functions. 5 Press LEARN again to exit. ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned in a certain programmed button in each area. 1 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. LEARN y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD When you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory preset setting (or manufacturer setting if you have set manufacturer codes). 72 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 73 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. TV ■ Elements of a sound field TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VOL FREQ/RDS MODE If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. START PTY SEEK SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E CH SELECT Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. EON TV INPUT Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. AV REC LEARN 1 POWER POWER TV AV PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL 5 AMP CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET RETURN DISPLAY 4 2 EFFECT STEREO HALL 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT EX/ES 9 0 REC JAZZ 10 ROCK 3 ENTER CHP/INDEX 1 Press AMP. AMP 2 3 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN DISPLAY Select the sound field program you want to adjust. STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 ROCK 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS PURE DIRECT NIGHT 9 0 EX/ES ENTER 10 CHP/INDEX ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Program No. Program name P08 MOVIE THEATER Cursor .General DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;15ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 English Parameters Parameter values 73 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 74 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 4 Press u / d to select the parameters. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – 5 6 Press j / i to change the parameter value. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory-set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the front panel display. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to change other program parameters. Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 63). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ■ Resetting parameters to the factory presets To reset a certain parameter Select the parameter you want to reset, then press j / i repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter name disappears. To reset all parameters Use PARAM. INI (see page 64). 74 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 75 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB – +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 – 99 msec Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 – 2.0 Time Level Level Time Early Reflections ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Level Source Sound Time Sound Source English Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 75 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 76 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 – 10 Source Sound Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 ■ SB INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 76 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 77 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound Source REV.TIME 60 dB REV.TIME Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Large value = 5.0 s Small value = 1.0 s ■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 – 250 msec Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Source Sound REV. LEVEL English Time 77 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 78 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3. For 7ch Stereo Function: These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) ■ PR LEVEL (Presence level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) Function: Control range: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For PRO LOGIC IIx Movie, Music and Game ■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx) Function: Choices: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources. PLII, PLIIx For DTS Neo:6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: 78 This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 – 0.5 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 79 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On-screen display does not appear. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 24 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 52 “GRAY BACK” in SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is currently being received. Set “GRAY BACK” to AUTO to always show the OSD. 63 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 26 The input mode is set to DTS or ANALOG. Select AUTO. 37 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons. 31 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 31 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 32 The input mode is set to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 37 The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 63 13-15 17-20 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause English 79 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 80 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Remedy Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 24 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 32 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings. 59 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on. 37 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 48 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 59 “CENTER SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 57 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 48 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 59 “SURR L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 57 A monaural source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SB SELECT. 61 “SURR L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. If the surround left and right speakers are set to NONE, the surround back speaker setting is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround speakers. 57 “SURR B L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRGx1 or SMLx1. 58 “LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to FRNT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 58 “LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 58 No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. The source does not contain low bass signals. 80 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 81 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 37 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 22 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 20 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 17-20, 47 The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 17-20, 47 The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 63 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 81 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 82 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. There is noise when the OSD is displayed. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. Refer to page Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The OSD may be disturbed when displaying OSD through component video connections. Select OFF in CMPNT OSD. 63 The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner (RX-V750) Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 82 Cause Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 22 Use the manual tuning method. 40 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 22 Use the manual tuning method. 40 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 40 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 40 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 83 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The manufacturer code was not correctly set. Set the manufacturer code correctly. 66 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. 66 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 69 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 69 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 72 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 83 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 84 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign and tuner presets. Be sure this unit is in standby mode. (RX-V750 U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO STANDBY/ON 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON. “FACTORY PRESET” appears in the front panel display. y To cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON. 2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the desired setting. Reset Cancel 3 84 To reset the unit to its factory presets. To cancel without making any changes. Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. If you selected “Reset”, the unit is reset to its factory presets and switches to standby mode. If you selected “Cancel”, the unit switches to standby mode and nothing is reset. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 85 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround English 85 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 86 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM GLOSSARY Sound field programs Audio information ■ CINEMA DSP ■ ITU-R Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 86 ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 87 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM GLOSSARY Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-Video signal With the S-Video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-Video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 87 01EN_00_RXV750_GB.book Page 88 Thursday, February 12, 2004 5:15 PM SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 100 W • Video Signal Type ........................................................... PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 140 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 135/170/200/245 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 150 W • IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 110 W • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION (RX-V750) • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General model] .......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ..................................................100 or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ....................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................... 0.02% CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ........... 0.06% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ........................................................ 42 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) Phono (5 mV) to REC OUT [U.K., Europe, Australia and Asia models] ..........................81 dB [Other models] ......................................................................86 dB CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ...............................100 dB AM SECTION (RX-V750) • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................. 150 µV or less • Usable Sensitivity ..............................................................300 µV/m • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shorted) to Front L/R .................................60 dB/55 dB CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ........................60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut .........................................................±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .................................................±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................3.5 kHz • Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO ................................................................... 2.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. .................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT .............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ..................................................................... 2 V/1.2 kΩ SUB WOOFER ............................................................ 4 V/1.7 kΩ • Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ..................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ..................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] .................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] .................AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ....................................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..................................400 W/500 VA [Other models] ..................................................................... 440 W • Standby Power Consumption .................................................. 0.1 W • AC Outlets [U.K. and Australia models] ................ 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [China, Asia and General models] ......... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Other models] ..................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) ...................................435 x 171 x 420 mm • Weight ....................................................................................12.5 kg 88 RXV750_RDS_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, January 21, 2004 11:44 AM GB RX-V750/DSP-AX750SE © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WC85520 RX-V750 AV Receiver DSP-AX750SE AV Amplifier OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX-V750 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V750 Manuale del proprietario
- français: Yamaha RX-V750 Le manuel du propriétaire
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V750 Bedienungsanleitung
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V750 Brugervejledning
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V750 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V750 El kitabı
- română: Yamaha RX-V750 Manualul proprietarului